rtn 620 idu hardware description v100r005c00 04

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemV100R005C00

IDU Hardware Description

Issue 04

Date 2010-10-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 04 (2010-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

http://www.huawei.com

mailto:[email protected]

About This Document

Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX RTN 620 V100R005C00

iManager U2000 V100R002C00

Intended AudienceThe intended audiences of this document are:

l Network planning engineer

l Hardware installation engineer

l Installation and commissioning engineer

l Field maintenance engineer

l Data configuration engineer

l System maintenance engineer

Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following:

l Basics of digital microwave communication

l Basics of the OptiX RTN 620

Symbol ConventionsThe symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description About This Document


iii

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,which if not avoided, will result in death orserious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low levelof risk, which if not avoided, could result inminor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,which if not avoided, could result inequipment damage, data loss, performancedegradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve aproblem or save time.

Provides additional information to emphasizeor supplement important points of the maintext.

Update HistoryUpdates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue containsall updates made to previous issues.

Updates in Issue 04 (2010-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00This document is the fourth release of the V100R005C00 version.

Compared with the third release, the updated contents are as follows:

Update Description

A Indicators, Weight and PowerConsumption of Boards

The descriptions of indicators are modified.

Updates in Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00This document is the third release of the V100R005C00 version.

Compared with the second release, the updated contents are as follows:

Update Description

5.2.1 IDU Protection Ground Cable The IDU protection ground cable connectiontable is added.

About This DocumentOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System


iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00This document is the second release of the V100R005C00 version.

Compared with the first release, the updated contents are as follows:

Update Description

5.8 Auxiliary Interface Cable The wire color of the auxiliary interface cableis added.

Updates in Issue 01 (2009-12-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00This document is the first release of the V100R005C00 version.

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description About This Document


v

Contents

About This Document...................................................................................................................iii

1 Introduction to the Product......................................................................................................1-11.1 Positioning.......................................................................................................................................................1-21.2 Components.....................................................................................................................................................1-4

2 Chassis..........................................................................................................................................2-12.1 Chassis Structure.............................................................................................................................................2-22.2 Installation Mode.............................................................................................................................................2-22.3 Installation Holes of the Chassis.....................................................................................................................2-22.4 IDU Labels......................................................................................................................................................2-3

3 Boards...........................................................................................................................................3-13.1 Board Appearance...........................................................................................................................................3-33.2 Board Configuration........................................................................................................................................3-33.3 IF1A/IF1B.......................................................................................................................................................3-6

3.3.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................3-73.3.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................3-73.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................3-83.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-123.3.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-153.3.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-153.3.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-17

3.4 IFX................................................................................................................................................................3-183.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-193.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-193.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-213.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-243.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-273.4.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-273.4.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-29

3.5 IF0A/IF0B.....................................................................................................................................................3-303.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-313.5.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-313.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-32

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description Contents


vii

3.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-343.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-373.5.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-373.5.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-39

3.6 IFH2..............................................................................................................................................................3-403.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-403.6.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-403.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-423.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-463.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-493.6.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-503.6.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-53

3.7 SL4................................................................................................................................................................3-553.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-553.7.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-553.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-573.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-593.7.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-613.7.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-613.7.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-613.7.8 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-62

3.8 SL1/SD1........................................................................................................................................................3-633.8.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-633.8.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-633.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-653.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-673.8.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-693.8.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-703.8.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-703.8.8 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-71

3.9 SLE/SDE.......................................................................................................................................................3-723.9.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-723.9.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-723.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-743.9.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-763.9.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-783.9.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-783.9.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-79

3.10 PL3..............................................................................................................................................................3-803.10.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-803.10.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-803.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-81

ContentsOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System


viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

3.10.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-833.10.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-843.10.6 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................3-853.10.7 Specifications.....................................................................................................................................3-85

3.11 PO1/PH1/PD1.............................................................................................................................................3-863.11.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-863.11.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-873.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-873.11.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-893.11.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-943.11.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................3-953.11.7 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................3-953.11.8 Specifications.....................................................................................................................................3-96

3.12 EFT4............................................................................................................................................................3-963.12.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-973.12.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-973.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-983.12.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1003.12.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1023.12.6 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-1033.12.7 Specifications...................................................................................................................................3-105

3.13 EMS6.........................................................................................................................................................3-1063.13.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1063.13.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1073.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-1103.13.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1123.13.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1163.13.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-1173.13.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-1173.13.8 Specifications...................................................................................................................................3-121

3.14 EFP6..........................................................................................................................................................3-1233.14.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1233.14.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1233.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-1263.14.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1283.14.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1313.14.6 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-1323.14.7 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-135

3.15 PXC...........................................................................................................................................................3-1363.15.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1373.15.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1373.15.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-138



ix

3.15.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1403.15.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1423.15.6 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-1423.15.7 Specifications...................................................................................................................................3-143

3.16 SCC...........................................................................................................................................................3-1443.16.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1443.16.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1453.16.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-1463.16.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1473.16.5 Jumpers and Storage Card................................................................................................................3-1543.16.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1563.16.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-1563.16.8 Specifications...................................................................................................................................3-158

3.17 Fan Tray Assembly...................................................................................................................................3-1593.17.1 Composition.....................................................................................................................................3-1603.17.2 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1603.17.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1613.17.4 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-1613.17.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1613.17.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-162

4 Accessories...................................................................................................................................4-14.1 E1 Panel...........................................................................................................................................................4-24.2 PDU.................................................................................................................................................................4-4

4.2.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................4-44.2.2 Functions and Working Principle...........................................................................................................4-64.2.3 Power Distribution Mode.......................................................................................................................4-7

5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................5-15.1 Power Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-35.2 Protection Ground Cable.................................................................................................................................5-3

5.2.1 IDU Protection Ground Cable................................................................................................................5-45.2.2 E1 Protection Ground Cable of an E1 Panel..........................................................................................5-5

5.3 IF Jumper.........................................................................................................................................................5-55.4 XPIC Cable.....................................................................................................................................................5-65.5 Fiber Jumper....................................................................................................................................................5-75.6 E1 Cable..........................................................................................................................................................5-9

5.6.1 DB44 E1 Cable.....................................................................................................................................5-105.6.2 DB44-DB37 E1 Cable..........................................................................................................................5-145.6.3 MDR68-DB44 E1 Cable......................................................................................................................5-15

5.7 External Clock Cable/Wayside Service Cable/STM-1e Cable.....................................................................5-175.8 Auxiliary Interface Cable..............................................................................................................................5-185.9 External Alarm Transit Cable.......................................................................................................................5-215.10 Serial Port Cable..........................................................................................................................................5-23

ContentsOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System


x Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

5.11 Orderwire Line............................................................................................................................................5-245.12 Network Cable.............................................................................................................................................5-25

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards...................................................A-1

B Glossary......................................................................................................................................B-1B.1 0-9..................................................................................................................................................................B-2B.2 A-E.................................................................................................................................................................B-2B.3 F-J................................................................................................................................................................B-11B.4 K-O..............................................................................................................................................................B-16B.5 P-T................................................................................................................................................................B-22B.6 U-Z...............................................................................................................................................................B-30



xi

Figures

Figure 1-1 TDM radio transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 620..................................................1-2Figure 1-2 Hybrid radio transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 620...............................................1-3Figure 1-3 Hybrid transmission network of the OptiX RTN 620 and other OptiX transmission products.........1-3Figure 1-4 IDU 620..............................................................................................................................................1-5Figure 1-5 Direct mounting .................................................................................................................................1-7Figure 1-6 Separate mounting..............................................................................................................................1-7Figure 2-1 IDU 620 chassis structure...................................................................................................................2-2Figure 2-2 IDU 620 chassis with wall-mounting holes........................................................................................2-3Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 620 labels..........................................................................................................2-5Figure 3-1 Board appearance................................................................................................................................3-3Figure 3-2 Board bar code....................................................................................................................................3-3Figure 3-3 IDU 620 configuration........................................................................................................................3-4Figure 3-4 Block diagram of the IF1A/IF1B working principle..........................................................................3-9Figure 3-5 IF1A front panel...............................................................................................................................3-12Figure 3-6 IF1B front panel................................................................................................................................3-13Figure 3-7 Slots of the IF1A/IF1B in the IDU 620............................................................................................3-15Figure 3-8 Block diagram of the IFX working principle...................................................................................3-21Figure 3-9 IFX front panel.................................................................................................................................3-25Figure 3-10 Slots of the IFX in the IDU 620.....................................................................................................3-27Figure 3-11 Block diagram of the IF0A/IF0B working principle......................................................................3-32Figure 3-12 IF0A front panel.............................................................................................................................3-35Figure 3-13 IF0B front panel..............................................................................................................................3-35Figure 3-14 Slots of the IF0A/IF0B in the IDU 620..........................................................................................3-37Figure 3-15 Cable connection for the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection in the Hybrid microwave..........................3-42Figure 3-16 Block diagram of the IFH2 working principle...............................................................................3-43Figure 3-17 IFH2 front panel.............................................................................................................................3-46Figure 3-18 RJ-45 front view.............................................................................................................................3-47Figure 3-19 Slots of the IFH2 in the IDU 620...................................................................................................3-49Figure 3-20 Block diagram of the SL4 working principle.................................................................................3-57Figure 3-21 SL4 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-59Figure 3-22 Slots of the SL4 in the IDU 620.....................................................................................................3-61Figure 3-23 Block diagram of the SL1/SD1 working principle.........................................................................3-65Figure 3-24 SL1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-67

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description Figures


xiii

Figure 3-25 SD1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-67Figure 3-26 Slots of the SL1/SD1 in the IDU 620.............................................................................................3-69Figure 3-27 Block diagram of the SLE/SDE working principle........................................................................3-74Figure 3-28 SLE front panel...............................................................................................................................3-76Figure 3-29 SDE front panel..............................................................................................................................3-76Figure 3-30 Slots of the SLE/SDE in the IDU 620............................................................................................3-78Figure 3-31 Block diagram of the PL3 working principle.................................................................................3-81Figure 3-32 PL3 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-83Figure 3-33 Slots of the PL3 in the IDU 620.....................................................................................................3-84Figure 3-34 Block diagram of the PO1/PH1/PD1 working principle................................................................3-87Figure 3-35 PO1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-89Figure 3-36 PH1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-89Figure 3-37 PD1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-90Figure 3-38 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface (PO1/PH1)........................................................................3-91Figure 3-39 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1).......................................................................3-92Figure 3-40 Pin assignments of the MDR68 interface (PD1)............................................................................3-93Figure 3-41 Slots of the PO1/PH1/PD1 in the IDU 620.................................................................................... 3-95Figure 3-42 Block diagram of the EFT4 working principle...............................................................................3-99Figure 3-43 EFT4 front panel...........................................................................................................................3-100Figure 3-44 RJ-45 front view...........................................................................................................................3-101Figure 3-45 Slots of the EFT4 in the IDU 620.................................................................................................3-102Figure 3-46 Block diagram of the EMS6 working principle............................................................................3-110Figure 3-47 EMS6 front panel..........................................................................................................................3-112Figure 3-48 RJ-45 front view...........................................................................................................................3-114Figure 3-49 Slots of the EMS6 in the IDU 620................................................................................................3-116Figure 3-50 Principle block diagram of the EFP6............................................................................................3-127Figure 3-51 Front panel of the EFP6................................................................................................................3-128Figure 3-52 RJ-45 front view...........................................................................................................................3-130Figure 3-53 Slots of the EFP6 in the IDU 620.................................................................................................3-131Figure 3-54 Block diagram of the PXC............................................................................................................3-138Figure 3-55 Cross-connect unit architecture....................................................................................................3-139Figure 3-56 PXC front panel............................................................................................................................3-140Figure 3-57 Slots of the PXC in the IDU 620..................................................................................................3-142Figure 3-58 Block diagram of the SCC............................................................................................................3-146Figure 3-59 SCC front panel............................................................................................................................3-148Figure 3-60 Pin assignments of the COM interface.........................................................................................3-150Figure 3-61 Pin assignments of the ETH/ETH-HUB interface........................................................................3-151Figure 3-62 Wrong connection of the ETH and the ETH-HUB interfaces......................................................3-152Figure 3-63 Pin assignments of the ALM/AUX interface...............................................................................3-152Figure 3-64 Positions of the jumpers and storage card....................................................................................3-154Figure 3-65 Slot of the SCC in the IDU 620....................................................................................................3-156Figure 3-66 Positions of Serial 1 to Serial 4 overhead bytes in an SDH frame...............................................3-158

FiguresOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System


xiv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Figure 3-67 Fan tray assembly composition....................................................................................................3-160Figure 3-68 Block diagram of the fan board....................................................................................................3-161Figure 3-69 FAN front panel............................................................................................................................3-162Figure 3-70 Slot of the fan tray assembly in the IDU 620...............................................................................3-163Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel..................................................................................................................4-2Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)...........................................................................................4-3Figure 4-3 PDU front panel..................................................................................................................................4-5Figure 4-4 Block diagram of the PDU working principle....................................................................................4-6Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in the DC-C mode...............................................................................4-7Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in the DC-I mode.................................................................................4-8Figure 5-1 Diagram of the power cable................................................................................................................5-3Figure 5-2 Diagram of the IDU protection ground cable.....................................................................................5-4Figure 5-3 Diagram of the protection ground cable of an E1 panel.....................................................................5-5Figure 5-4 View of the IF jumper........................................................................................................................5-6Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable......................................................................................................................5-7Figure 5-6 LC/PC fiber connector........................................................................................................................5-8Figure 5-7 SC/PC fiber connector........................................................................................................................5-8Figure 5-8 FC/PC fiber connector........................................................................................................................5-9Figure 5-9 Diagram of the 75-ohm cable (2x8 core cable)................................................................................5-10Figure 5-10 Diagram of the 75-ohm cable (1x16 core cable)............................................................................5-11Figure 5-11 Diagram of the 120-ohm cable.......................................................................................................5-11Figure 5-12 Diagram of the DB44-DB37 E1 cable............................................................................................5-14Figure 5-13 Diagram of the MDR68-D44 E1 cable...........................................................................................5-16Figure 5-14 Diagram of the external clock cable/wayside service cable/STM-1e cable...................................5-18Figure 5-15 Diagram of the auxiliary interface cable........................................................................................5-19Figure 5-16 Diagram of the external alarm transit cable....................................................................................5-21Figure 5-17 Diagram of the serial port cable......................................................................................................5-24Figure 5-18 Diagram of the orderwire wire.......................................................................................................5-24Figure 5-19 Diagram of the network cable.........................................................................................................5-26

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description Figures


xv

Tables

Table 1-1 Brief introduction to the IDU 620........................................................................................................1-4Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 620.............................................................................1-5Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 620..........................................................................1-6Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels..............................................................................................................2-3Table 3-1 List of boards on the IDU 620..............................................................................................................3-4Table 3-2 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1A/IF1B......................................................3-9Table 3-3 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1A/IF1B...................................................3-11Table 3-4 IF1A/IF1B indicator description........................................................................................................3-13Table 3-5 IF1A/IF1B interface description........................................................................................................3-14Table 3-6 Slot assigning principle of the IF1A/IF1B.........................................................................................3-15Table 3-7 Radio work modes..............................................................................................................................3-15Table 3-8 IF performance...................................................................................................................................3-17Table 3-9 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem...................................................................3-18Table 3-10 Integrated system performance of the IF1A/IF1B...........................................................................3-18Table 3-11 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX..............................................................3-22Table 3-12 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX............................................................3-24Table 3-13 IFX indicator description.................................................................................................................3-25Table 3-14 IFX interface description..................................................................................................................3-26Table 3-15 Slot assigning principle of the IFX..................................................................................................3-27Table 3-16 Radio work mode.............................................................................................................................3-27Table 3-17 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-29Table 3-18 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem................................................................3-30Table 3-19 XPIC performance...........................................................................................................................3-30Table 3-20 Integrated system performance of the IFX.......................................................................................3-30Table 3-21 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF0A/IF0B..................................................3-33Table 3-22 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF0A/IF0B.................................................3-34Table 3-23 IF0A/IF0B indicator description......................................................................................................3-35Table 3-24 IF0A/IF0B interface description......................................................................................................3-36Table 3-25 Slot assigning principle of the IF0A/IF0B.......................................................................................3-37Table 3-26 Radio work modes............................................................................................................................3-38Table 3-27 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-39Table 3-28 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem................................................................3-39Table 3-29 Integrated system performance of the IF0A/IF0B...........................................................................3-40

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description Tables


xvii

Table 3-30 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFH2............................................................3-43Table 3-31 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFH2..........................................................3-45Table 3-32 IFH2 indicator description...............................................................................................................3-46Table 3-33 IFH2 interface description................................................................................................................3-47Table 3-34 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode..............................................................3-48Table 3-35 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode.........................................................3-48Table 3-36 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description........................................................................................3-49Table 3-37 Slot assigning principle of the IFH2................................................................................................3-50Table 3-38 Radio work modes in the case of hybrid microwave frames...........................................................3-50Table 3-39 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-53Table 3-40 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem................................................................3-54Table 3-41 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface performance..............................................................................3-54Table 3-42 Integrated system performance of the IFH2.....................................................................................3-54Table 3-43 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL4..............................................................3-58Table 3-44 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL4............................................................3-59Table 3-45 SL4 indicator description.................................................................................................................3-60Table 3-46 SL4 interface description.................................................................................................................3-60Table 3-47 Board feature code of the SL4.........................................................................................................3-61Table 3-48 STM-4 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-62Table 3-49 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SL4...............................................................3-63Table 3-50 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1/SD1.....................................................3-66Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1/SD1....................................................3-67Table 3-52 SL1/SD1 indicator description.........................................................................................................3-68Table 3-53 SL1 interface description.................................................................................................................3-69Table 3-54 SD1 interface description.................................................................................................................3-69Table 3-55 Slot assigning principle of the SL1/SD1..........................................................................................3-70Table 3-56 Board feature code of the SL1/SD1.................................................................................................3-70Table 3-57 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-71Table 3-58 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SL1/SD1.......................................................3-72Table 3-59 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SLE/SDE....................................................3-74Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SLE/SDE...................................................3-75Table 3-61 SLE/SDE indicator description........................................................................................................3-77Table 3-62 SLE interface description.................................................................................................................3-77Table 3-63 SDE interface description................................................................................................................3-77Table 3-64 Slot assigning principle of the SLE/SDE.........................................................................................3-78Table 3-65 STM-1 electrical interface performance..........................................................................................3-79Table 3-66 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SLE/SDE......................................................3-79Table 3-67 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the PL3..............................................................3-81Table 3-68 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the PL3............................................................3-82Table 3-69 PL3 indicator description.................................................................................................................3-83Table 3-70 PL3 interface description.................................................................................................................3-84Table 3-71 Slot assigning principle of the PL3..................................................................................................3-84

TablesOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System


xviii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Table 3-72 E3/T3 interface performance............................................................................................................3-85Table 3-73 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PL3...............................................................3-85Table 3-74 Differences between SL61PO1 and SL62PO1............................................................................... 3-86Table 3-75 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the PO1/PH1/PD1.............................................3-88Table 3-76 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the PO1/PH1/PD1...........................................3-88Table 3-77 PO1/PH1/PD1 indicator description................................................................................................3-90Table 3-78 SL61PO1 interface description........................................................................................................3-90Table 3-79 SL62PO1 interface description........................................................................................................3-91Table 3-80 PH1 interface description.................................................................................................................3-91Table 3-81 PD1 interface description.................................................................................................................3-91Table 3-82 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface (PO1/PH1).........................................................................3-92Table 3-83 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1).........................................................................3-92Table 3-84 Indicator description of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1)................................................................. 3-93Table 3-85 Pin assignments of the MDR68 interface (PD1)..............................................................................3-93Table 3-86 Slot assigning principle of the PO1/PH1/PD1.................................................................................3-95Table 3-87 Board feature code of the PO1/PH1/PD1.........................................................................................3-95Table 3-88 E1 interface performance.................................................................................................................3-96Table 3-89 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PO1/PH1......................................................3-96Table 3-90 Differences between SL61EFT4VER.A and SL61EFT4VER.B.....................................................3-97Table 3-91 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EFT4...........................................................3-99Table 3-92 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EFT4.......................................................3-100Table 3-93 EFT4 indicator description.............................................................................................................3-101Table 3-94 EFT4 interface description.............................................................................................................3-101Table 3-95 Pin assignments of FE1-FE4 interfaces.........................................................................................3-102Table 3-96 Ethernet port indicator description.................................................................................................3-102Table 3-97 Slot assigning principle of the EFT4..............................................................................................3-103Table 3-98 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance.....................................................................................3-105Table 3-99 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EFT4..........................................................3-106Table 3-100 Differences between SL61EMS6VER.A and SL61EMS6VER.B...............................................3-107Table 3-101 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EMS6......................................................3-111Table 3-102 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EMS6....................................................3-111Table 3-103 EMS6 indicator description..........................................................................................................3-112Table 3-104 EMS6 interface description..........................................................................................................3-114Table 3-105 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode..........................................................3-115Table 3-106 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode.....................................................3-115Table 3-107 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description....................................................................................3-116Table 3-108 Slot assigning principle of the EMS6...........................................................................................3-117Table 3-109 Board feature code of the EMS6..................................................................................................3-117Table 3-110 GE optical interface performance................................................................................................3-121Table 3-111 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface performance..........................................................................3-122Table 3-112 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance...................................................................................3-122Table 3-113 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EMS6.......................................................3-123



xix

Table 3-114 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EFP6.......................................................3-127Table 3-115 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EFP6......................................................3-128Table 3-116 Description of indicators on the EFP6.........................................................................................3-129Table 3-117 Description of the interfaces on the EFP6....................................................................................3-130Table 3-118 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode..........................................................3-130Table 3-119 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode.....................................................3-131Table 3-120 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description....................................................................................3-131Table 3-121 Slot Allocation for the SL1D.......................................................................................................3-132Table 3-122 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance...................................................................................3-136Table 3-123 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EFP6.........................................................3-136Table 3-124 PXC indicator description............................................................................................................3-140Table 3-125 PXC interface description............................................................................................................3-141Table 3-126 Slot assigning principle of the PXC.............................................................................................3-142Table 3-127 Clock timing and synchronization performance..........................................................................3-143Table 3-128 Wayside service interface performance.......................................................................................3-143Table 3-129 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PXC..........................................................3-144Table 3-130 Difference between the functional versions.................................................................................3-145Table 3-131 SCC indicator description............................................................................................................3-148Table 3-132 SCC interface description............................................................................................................3-149Table 3-133 Pin assignments of the COM interface.........................................................................................3-150Table 3-134 Pin assignments of the ETH/ETH-HUB interface.......................................................................3-151Table 3-135 ETH/ETH-HUB indicator description.........................................................................................3-151Table 3-136 Pin assignments of the ALM/AUX (ALM/S1) interface.............................................................3-152Table 3-137 Setting the jumpers.......................................................................................................................3-155Table 3-138 Orderwire interface performance.................................................................................................3-158Table 3-139 Synchronous data interface performance.....................................................................................3-158Table 3-140 Asynchronous data interface performance...................................................................................3-159Table 3-141 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SCC..........................................................3-159Table 3-142 Differences between SL61FAN and SL61FANA........................................................................3-160Table 3-143 FAN indicator description............................................................................................................3-162Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel.....................................................................................................4-2Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)............................................................................................4-3Table 4-3 PDU interface description....................................................................................................................4-5Table 5-1 Power cable connections......................................................................................................................5-3Table 5-2 IDU protection ground cable connections............................................................................................5-4Table 5-3 Types of fiber jumpers.........................................................................................................................5-7Table 5-4 75-ohm E1 cable connections (2x8 core cable).................................................................................5-12Table 5-5 75-ohm E1 cable connections (1x16 core cable)...............................................................................5-12Table 5-6 120-ohm E1 cable connections..........................................................................................................5-13Table 5-7 Connection table of the DB44-DB37 E1 cabl....................................................................................5-15Table 5-8 MDR68-DB44 E1 cable connections.................................................................................................5-16Table 5-9 Auxiliary interface cable connections (1)..........................................................................................5-19

TablesOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System


xx Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Table 5-10 Auxiliary interface cable connections (2)........................................................................................5-20Table 5-11 Auxiliary interface cable connections (3)........................................................................................ 5-21Table 5-12 External alarm transit cable connections..........................................................................................5-22Table 5-13 Serial port cable connections........................................................................................................... 5-24Table 5-14 Orderwire wire connections.............................................................................................................5-25Table 5-15 Pin assignments of the MDI.............................................................................................................5-25Table 5-16 Pin assignments of the MDI-X.........................................................................................................5-26Table 5-17 Cable connection of the straight through cable................................................................................5-27Table 5-18 Cable connection of the crossover cable..........................................................................................5-27Table A-1 IF1A/IF1B indicator description........................................................................................................A-1Table A-2 IFX indicator description....................................................................................................................A-2Table A-3 IF0A/IF0B indicator description........................................................................................................A-3Table A-4 IFH2 indicator description..................................................................................................................A-5Table A-5 SL4 indicator description...................................................................................................................A-6Table A-6 SL1/SD1 indicator description...........................................................................................................A-6Table A-7 SLE/SDE indicator description..........................................................................................................A-7Table A-8 PL3 indicator description...................................................................................................................A-8Table A-9 PO1/PH1/PD1 indicator description..................................................................................................A-8Table A-10 EFT4 indicator description...............................................................................................................A-9Table A-11 EMS6 indicator description..............................................................................................................A-9Table A-12 Description of indicators on the EFP6...........................................................................................A-11Table A-13 PXC indicator description..............................................................................................................A-12Table A-14 SCC indicator description..............................................................................................................A-13Table A-15 FAN indicator description..............................................................................................................A-14Table A-16 Weight of Boards............................................................................................................................A-14



xxi

1 Introduction to the Product

About This Chapter

This chapter provides basic information on the OptiX RTN 620 and the IDU 620 in terms ofproduct application and equipment type.

1.1 PositioningThe OptiX RTN 620 is a split radio transmission system developed by Huawei. It can providea seamless radio transmission solution for the mobile communication network or privatenetworks.

1.2 ComponentsThe OptiX RTN 620 is of a split structure, consisting of the IDU 620 and the ODU. Each ODUis connected to the IDU 620 through an IF cable.

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description 1 Introduction to the Product


1-1

1.1 PositioningThe OptiX RTN 620 is a split radio transmission system developed by Huawei. It can providea seamless radio transmission solution for the mobile communication network or privatenetworks.

The OptiX RTN 620 provides several types of service interfaces, and features flexibleconfiguration and easy installation. In addition, the OptiX RTN 620 can provide a TDMmicrowave and Hybrid microwave integrated solution according to the network requirements,and supports the hybrid networking of microwave and optical fibers.

l TDM radio transmission solutionIn the TDM radio transmission solution, the OptiX RTN 620 transmits TDM services atthe E1, E3, and STM-1 levels, and Ethernet services in the manner of Ethernet over SDHor Ethernet over PDH.

Figure 1-1 TDM radio transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 620

E1

E1

FE

STM-1/E1

E1 FE

E1

FE

E1

E1

BSC

RNC

FE/GE

STM-1/E1

RegionalBackhaulNetwork

OptiX RTN 620 BTS NodeB BSC RNCMSTP

l Hybrid radio transmission solution

The OptiX RTN 620 supports an upgrade from the TDM radio transmission solution to theHybrid radio transmission solution, and can transmit the Native E1 service and NativeEthernet service.

1 Introduction to the ProductOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System


1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Figure 1-2 Hybrid radio transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 620

Regional BackhaulNetwork

OptiX RTN 620 BTSNodeB BSCRNC

FEE1

FEE1

E1

E1FE

FE/GE

E1

GE

E1

E1

STM-1/E1

FE

l Radio and optical fiber hybrid networking solution

The OptiX RTN 620 can be networked with other OptiX transmission products. Thus, itcan provide an optical transmission and radio transmission seamlessly integrated solutionto transmit SDH, PDH, and Ethernet services.

Figure 1-3 Hybrid transmission network of the OptiX RTN 620 and other OptiXtransmission products

SDH/PDH/Ethernet

SDH/PDH/Ethernet

STM-1ring

STM-4ring

MSTPOptiX RTN 620



1-3

1.2 ComponentsThe OptiX RTN 620 is of a split structure, consisting of the IDU 620 and the ODU. Each ODUis connected to the IDU 620 through an IF cable.

IDU 620The IDU 620 is the indoor unit of the OptiX RTN 620. It accesses services, performsmultiplexing/demultiplexing and IF processing of the services, and provides system control andcommunication function.

Table 1-1 provides the brief introduction to the IDU 620 .

Table 1-1 Brief introduction to the IDU 620

Item Performance

Chassis height 2U

Pluggable Supported

Service interfaces E1, E3, STM-1o, STM-1e, STM-4, FE, GE

Ethernet processingcapability

l Supports the VLAN and QinQ.l Supports the transparent transmission, supports EPL,

EVPL, EPLAN, and EVPLAN.l Supports QoS (including CAR, CoS, and shaping)

functions, traffic classification based on VLAN ID, IEEE802.1p, and DSCP, eight priority queues, and SP + WRRqueue scheduling.

l Supports Ethernet OAM based on IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah.

l Supports the LAG.l Supports the LPT.l Supports the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)

protection.l Supports the Ethernet over SDH or Ethernet over PDH.l Supports synchronous Ethernet.

Number of microwavedirections

1 to 4

RF configuration mode l 1+0 non-protection configurationl N+0 non-protection configuration (N≤4)l 1+1 protection configurationl N+1 protection configuration (N = 2 or N = 3)l XPIC configuration




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

NOTE

The Hybrid microwave and the PDH microwave do not support the N+1 protection configuration and theXPIC configuration.

Figure 1-4 IDU 620

ODUThe ODU is the outdoor unit of the OptiX RTN 620. It performs frequency conversion andamplification of signals.

The OptiX RTN 620 provide a complete ODU solution, and support an entire frequency bandfrom 6 GHz to 38 GHz. OptiX RTN 620 supports the RTN 600 ODUand RTN XMC ODU. TheOptiX RTN 620 supports three series ODU: standard power, high power, and low capacity forPDH to meet the requirements of different scenarios.

NOTE

Unlike the other frequency bands that use 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz channel spacing, the 18 GHzfrequency band uses 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, or 55 MHz channel spacing correspondingly.

Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 620

Item Description

Standard PowerODU

High Power ODU Low Capacity forPDH ODU

ODU type SP and SPA HP LP and LPA

Frequency band 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/26/38 GHz (SPODU)6/7/8/11/13/15/18/23 GHz (SPA ODU)

7/8/10/10.5/11/13/15/18/23/26/28/32/38GHz)

7/8/11/13/15/18/23GHz (LP ODU)7/8/11/13/15/18/23/26/32/38 GHz (LPAODU)



1-5

Item Description

Standard PowerODU

High Power ODU Low Capacity forPDH ODU

Microwavemodulation mode

QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM(SP ODU)QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM (SPAODU)

QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM

QPSK/16QAM

Channel spacing 3.5/7/14/28 MHz 7/14/28/40/56 MHz(7/8/10/11/13/15/18/23/26/28/32/38 GHzfrequency band)7/14/28 MHz (10.5GHz frequencyband)

3.5/7/14/28 MHz

Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 620

Item Description

High Power ODU Low Capacity for PDH ODU

ODU type XMC-2 XMC-1

Frequency band 7/8/13/15/18/23 GHz 7/8/13/15/18/23 GHz

Microwavemodulationmode

QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM

QPSK/16QAM

Channelspacing

7/14/28/56 MHz (7/13/15/18/23GHz frequency band)7/14/28/40/56 MHz (8 GHzfrequency band)

3.5/7/14/28 MHz

There are two methods of mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separatemounting.

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 620 provides an entire frequency band antenna solution, and supports the single-polarizedantenna and dual-polarized antenna with a diameter of 0.3 m to 3.7 m and the corresponding feeder system.

l The direct mounting method is normally adopted when a small-diameter and single-polarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna, theODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for one




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

antenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hereinafter referred to as a hybrid coupler) mustbe mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-5 shows the direct mounting.

Figure 1-5 Direct mounting

l The separate mounting method is adopted when a double-polarized antenna or a large-

diameter and single-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-6 shows the separate mounting.In this situation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted to enable two ODUs to share one feedboom.

Figure 1-6 Separate mounting



1-7

2 Chassis

About This Chapter

The IDU 620 is a 2U chassis with four layers and houses pluggable boards.

2.1 Chassis StructureThe dimensions of the IDU 620 are as follows: 442 mm x 220 mm x 87 mm (width x depth xheight). The IDU 620 has a four-layer structure and supports wind-cooling.

2.2 Installation ModeThe IDU 620 chassis support multiple installation modes.

2.3 Installation Holes of the ChassisThe IDU chassis is available in two types according to its installation holes.

2.4 IDU LabelsLabels, such as the product nameplate label, certificate of qualification label, ESD protectionlabel, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operationwarning label are on the IDU chassis and boards. You should know the meanings of the labelsand perform operations according to the indications of the labels to prevent personal injury anddamage to the equipment.

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description 2 Chassis


2-1

2.1 Chassis StructureThe dimensions of the IDU 620 are as follows: 442 mm x 220 mm x 87 mm (width x depth xheight). The IDU 620 has a four-layer structure and supports wind-cooling.

The and Figure 2-1 show the chassis structures of the IDU 620 respectively.

Figure 2-1 IDU 620 chassis structure

2.2 Installation ModeThe IDU 620 chassis support multiple installation modes.

The IIDU 620 can be installed as follows:

l In a 300 mm ETSI cabinetl In a 600 mm ETSI cabinetl In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinetl In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinetl In an open cabinetl On a walll On a desk

2.3 Installation Holes of the ChassisThe IDU chassis is available in two types according to its installation holes.

The three groups of installation holes are used for the following three installation modes:

l Installing the IDU chassis in a cabinetl Installing the IDU chassis in an open rack

When you install the IDU chassis in an open rack, you can use the holes for the open rackor the holes for the cabinet depending on the actual situation.

2 ChassisOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System



Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

l Installing the IDU chassis on the walll Figure 2-2 IDU 620 chassis with wall-mounting holes

Installation holesfor the open rack

Installation holesfor wall-mouting

Installation holesfor the cabinet

2.4 IDU LabelsLabels, such as the product nameplate label, certificate of qualification label, ESD protectionlabel, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operationwarning label are on the IDU chassis and boards. You should know the meanings of the labelsand perform operations according to the indications of the labels to prevent personal injury anddamage to the equipment.

Label DescriptionTable 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards. The actual labelsmay be different depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards.

Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels

Label Label Name Indication

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,and (2) this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that may causeundesired operation.

POWER RATING: -48－ -60V ; 10A

华为技术有限公司中国制作MADE IN CHINA

电源额定值

OptiX RTN 620

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

N14036

Productnameplate label

The product name and certification



2-3


合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD

华为技术有限公司中国制作MADE IN CHINAHUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

HUAWEI

Certificate ofqualificationlabel

The equipment is qualified.

FAN

IU7(IF)IU5(IF)

IU3(PXC)IU1(PXC)

IU8(IF)IU6(IF)

IU4(EXT)(TPS)IU2(SCC)

Board layoutlabel

The boards that can be installed ineach slot

ESD

ESD protectionlabel

The equipment is sensitive to staticelectricity.

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

Laser safetyclass label

The power class of the laser source

Grounding labelon the chassisbody

The grounding position in thechassis body

Grounding labelon the mountingear

The grounding position in themounting ear

ATTENTION 警告

CLEAN PERIODICALLY 定期清洗

! Periodiccleaning label

The air filter should be cleanedperiodically.

严禁在风扇高速旋转时接触叶片

DON'T TOUCH THEFAN LEAVES BEFORETHEY SLOW DOWN !

Fan warninglabel

The fan blades should not betouched when the fan is rotating.

Hightemperaturewarning label

The board surface temperature mayexceed 70°C when the ambienttemperature is higher than 55°C. Inthis case, you need to wearprotective gloves before touchingthe board.

WARNING-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

! Operationwarning label

The ODU-PWR switch must beturned off before the IF cable isremoved.

2 ChassisOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System



Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


PULL

Operationguidance label

The switch lever must be pulledoutwards slightly before setting theswitch to the "I" or "O" position.NOTE

There may be no operation guidancelabel on the equipment that weredelivered previously.

Label Position

Figure 2-3 shows the positions of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards by using the IDU620 as an example. The actual positions of the labels may be different depending on theconfigurations of the chassis and boards.

Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 620 labels

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,and (2) this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that may causeundesired operation.

POWER RATING: -48－ -60V ; 10A

华为技术有限公司中国制作MADE IN CHINA

电源额定值

OptiX RTN 620

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

N14036

合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD

华为技术有限公司中国制作MADE IN CHINAHUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

HUAWEI

ATTENTION 警告

CLEAN PERIODICALLY 定期清洗

!

严禁在风扇高速旋转时接触叶片

DON'T TOUCH THEFAN LEAVES BEFORETHEY SLOW DOWN !

WARNING-48V OUTPUT


!

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

ESD

FAN

IU7(IF)IU5(IF)

IU3(PXC)IU1(PXC)

IU8(IF)IU6(IF)

IU4(EXT)(TPS)IU2(SCC)

PULL



2-5

3 Boards

About This Chapter

The IDU 620 support the following types of boards: IF board, SDH board, PDH board, Ethernetboard, integrated power cross-connect clock board, system control and communication board,and fan board.

The boards of each type are as follows:

l IF board: IF1A/IF1B, IFX, IF0A/IF0B, IFH2l SDH board: SL4, SL1, SD1, SLE, SDEl PDH board: PL3, PO1, PH1, PD1l Ethernet board: EFT4, EMS6, EFP6l Integrated power cross-connect clock board: PXCl System control and communication board: SCCl Fan board: FAN

3.1 Board AppearanceThe board dimensions of the IDU 620 are 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth xheight).

3.2 Board ConfigurationThe IDU 620 can implement different functions when it is configured with different types ofboards.

3.3 IF1A/IF1BThe IF1A/IF1B is the SDH intermediate frequency (IF) board.

3.4 IFXThe IFX is a cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) IF board.

3.5 IF0A/IF0BThe IF0A/IF0B is the PDH intermediate frequency board.

3.6 IFH2The IFH2 is a hybrid IF board.

3.7 SL4The SL4 is an SDH single-port STM-4 board.

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description 3 Boards


3-1

3.8 SL1/SD1The SL1 is an SDH single-port STM-1 board. The SD1 is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board.

3.9 SLE/SDEThe SLE is an SDH single-port electrical STM-1 board and the SDE is an SDH dual-portelectrical STM-1 board.

3.10 PL3The PL3 is a 3xE3/T3 tributary board.

3.11 PO1/PH1/PD1The PO1 is an 8xE1 tributary board. The PH1 is a 16xE1 tributary board.The PD1 is a 32xE1tributary board.

3.12 EFT4The EFT4 is a 4-port 10M/100M Ethernet transparent transmission board.

3.13 EMS6The EMS6 is a 4-Port RJ-45 + 2-Port SFP Fast Ethernet / Gigabit Ethernet Switching ProcessingBoard.

3.14 EFP6The EFP6 is a 6-port Fast Ethernet EoPDH processing board.

3.15 PXCThe PXC is an integrated power cross-connect clock board.

3.16 SCCThe SCC is a system control and communication board.

3.17 Fan Tray AssemblyThe IDU 620 adopts wind-cooling and thus is configured with the fan tray assembly.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System



Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

3.1 Board AppearanceThe board dimensions of the IDU 620 are 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth xheight).

Figure 3-1 Board appearance

On the front panel of the board, there are two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejectorlevers are used to insert and remove the boards. The captive screws are used to fasten the board.The bar code of the board is attached to one of the two ejector levers.In the case of the EMS6board, a label indicating the MAC address is affixed on one ejector lever of the board.

Figure 3-2 Board bar code

Bar code

②

Inner code

③④

Board versionBoard nameBoard feature code

①

0514721055000015-SL61SD101① ② ③ ④

NOTE

The board feature code of an optical interface board is used to indicate the type of the optical interface onthe board. The board feature code of an E1 interface board is used to indicate the impedance of the interfaceon the board. For a detailed description of the board feature code, refer to the description of each board inthe document.

3.2 Board ConfigurationThe IDU 620 can implement different functions when it is configured with different types ofboards.



3-3

Figure 3-3 IDU 620 configuration

FAN

Slot 20

EXT/IF Slot7

EXT/IF Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT/IF Slot8

EXT/IF Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

NOTE

EXT refers to the extended slot for a service board. IF refers to the slot for an IF board.

Table 3-1 List of boards on the IDU 620

BoardName

Full Name Valid Slot Description

PXC Integrated power cross-connect clock board

Slot 1/3 Accesses one input of -48 V/-60V DC power.Provides a full timeslot cross-connection for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to16x16 VC-4.Supports the input and output ofone external clock signal.

SCC System control andcommunication board

Slot 2 Integrates an EOW subboard,occupying the logical slot 21.Provides the NM interface,external alarm interface,synchronous/asynchronous datainterface, and orderwireinterface.

IF1A SDH intermediatefrequency board

Slot 5/6/7/8 Provides one IF interface. Thelogical slot number of the ODUthat is connected to the IF boardis 10 plus the slot number of theIF board.The IF1A and IF1B boardssupport the TU-based and STM-1based microwave frame formatsfor establishing microwave linksbetween two sets of IDU 620.The IF0A and IF0B boardssupport the E1-based microwaveframe format for establishingmicrowave links with the IDU605 1D/2D.

IF1B

IF0A PDH intermediatefrequency board

Slot 5/6/7/8

IF0B




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

BoardName


IFX XPIC intermediatefrequency board

Slot 5/6/7/8 Provides one IF interface. Thelogical slot number of the ODUthat is connected to the IF boardis 10 plus the slot number of theIF board.Provides the XPIC function.Provides the STM-1 basedmicrowave frame structure.

IFH2 Hybrid intermediatefrequency board

Slot 5/6/7/8 l Provides one IF interface. Thelogical slot number of theODU that is connected to theIF board is 10 plus the slotnumber of the IF board.

l Provides one FE/GE electricalinterface for accessingEthernet services.

l Supports the AM function.

SL4 SDH single-port STM-4board

Slot 6/8 Uses the SFP optical module toprovide one STM-4 opticalinterface.

SL1 SDH single-port STM-1board

Slot 4/5/6/7/8 Uses the SFP optical module toprovide one STM-1 opticalinterface.

SD1 SDH dual-port STM-1board

Uses the SFP optical module toprovide two STM-1 opticalinterfaces.

SLE SDH single-port STM-1electrical board

Provides one 75-ohm STM-1electrical interface.

SDE SDH dual-port STM-1electrical board

Provides two 75-ohm STM-1electrical interfaces.

PL3 3xE3/T3 tributary board Slot 4/5/6/7/8 Provides three 75-ohm E3/T3electrical interfaces.

PO1 8xE1 tributary board Provides eight 75/120-ohm E1interfaces.

PH1 16xE1 tributary board Provides 16 75/120-ohm E1interfaces.

PD1 32xE1 tributary board Provides 32 75/120-ohm E1interfaces.



3-5

BoardName


EFT4 4-port 10M/100MEthernet transparenttransmission processingboard

Slot 4/5/6/7/8 Provides a 4x10/100BASE-T(X)interface for processing Ethernettransparent transmissionservices. The maximum uplinkbandwidth of the board is2xVC-4.

EMS6 4-port RJ-45 + 2-portSFP Fast Ethernet/Gigabit Ethernetswitching processingboard

Provides four FE electricalinterfaces. The other two portsuse SFP optical/electricalmodules for providing two GEoptical/electrical interfaces. TheGE electrical interface iscompatible with the FE electricalinterface.Supports the transparentlytransmitted Ethernet services andLayer 2 switching services. Themaximum uplink bandwidth ofthe board is 2xVC-4.

EFP6 6-port RJ-45 FastEthernet EoPDHswitching processingboard

Slot 4/5/6/7/8 Provides six FE electricalinterfaces.Provides the EoPDH processingfunction.Supports the transparentlytransmitted Ethernet services andLayer 2 switching services. Theuplink bandwidth of the board is63xE1.

FAN Fan board Slot 20 Provides wind cooling for theIDU 620.

3.3 IF1A/IF1BThe IF1A/IF1B is the SDH intermediate frequency (IF) board.

3.3.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IF1A/IF1B is SL61.

3.3.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IF1A/IF1B receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel tothe ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IF1A/IF1B board supports the DC-Ipower distribution mode.

3.3.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the IF1A/IF1B.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

3.3.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF port, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.

3.3.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the IF1A/IF1B can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8.

3.3.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radiowork mode, radio Link ID, wayside service attributes, ATPC attributes and J1 byte. The waysideservice attributes and J1 bytes apply to SDH microwave only. The other parameters apply toboth PDH and SDH microwaves.

3.3.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including baseband signal processingperformance of modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.



IF Processingl Maps PDH service signals and SDH service signals into microwave frame signals.l Codes and decodes microwave frame signals.l Modulates and demodulates microwave frame signals.l Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals.l Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.

Overhead Processingl Processes the regenerator section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.l Processes the multiplex section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.l Processes the higher order path overheads of the SDH microwave signals.l Processes the overheads of the PDH microwave signals.l Supports the setting and querying of the J0/J1/C2 byte in SDH microwave signals.l Supports the setting and querying of the Link ID.

NOTEHigher order path overheads are processed in two modes. The first mode is called the pass-through mode.The path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values are not modified.The second mode is called the termination mode. When the path overheads are detected in the receivedirection, the transmit direction resets the overheads according to the default value of the board. By default,the board adopts the pass-through mode.

Pointer Processingl Processes the AU pointer in SDH microwave signals.



3-7

l Processes the TU pointer in PDH microwave signals.

Protection Processingl Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.

l Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.

l Supports N+1 protection.

l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channelsin an SNCP group.

l Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions.

NOTE

l For the details of 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 1+1 SD, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio TransmissionSystem Feature Description.

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Provides rich alarms and performance events.

l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the alarm threshold.

l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performancethreshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.

NOTEFor the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the IF port.

l Supports inloop on the VC-4 path.

l Supports the detecting of the board temperature.

l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the servicesare not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also theboard is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed,services can be interrupted.

3.3.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the IF1A/IF1B.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-4 Block diagram of the IF1A/IF1B working principle

Backplane

PXCIF IF

processingunit

Logicprocessing

unit SCC

SCC

Service bus

Overhead bus Control bus

Microwaveservice signal

MUX/DEMUX

unit

MODEMunit

Combinerinterface

unit

Powerunit

SMODEMunit

Clockunit

Logiccontrol unit

SCC

ODU control signal

Paired boards

Channel switchingsignal

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-2 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1A/IF1B

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Combiner interfaceunit

Divides the ODU control signal and the microwaveservice signal from the IF signal.

2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates the ODU control signal.l Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial port of

the SCC CPU.

3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of the service signal through theautomatic gain control (AGC) circuit.

l Filters the signal.l Performs A/D conversion.

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.l Performs FEC decoding and generates the

corresponding alarms.



3-9

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

5 MUX/DEMUX unit(for SDH microwavesignal processing)

l Synchronizes frames and detects the R_LOS andR_LOF alarms.

l Performs descrambling.l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the

corresponding alarms and performance events.l Checks the Link ID and generates the corresponding

alarms.l Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte

and generates the corresponding alarms andperformance events.

l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte andreports it to the SCC.

l Detects the changes in the ATPC message and themicrowave RDI, and reports them to the SCC throughthe control bus.

l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes andK bytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it tothe logic processing unit.

l Extracts the wayside service bytes to form another 2Moverhead signal and sends it to the logic processingunit.

l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates thecorresponding performance events.

l Checks higher order path overheads and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4signal into the logic processing unit.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

MUX/DEMUX unit(for PDH microwavesignal processing)

l Detects the PDH microwave frame header andgenerates the corresponding alarms and performanceevents.

l Verifies the check code and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Detects the Link ID and generates the correspondingalarms.


l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes,DCC bytes and K bytes to form a 2M overhead signaland sends it to the logic processing unit.

l Adjusts the TU pointer.l Maps the TU-12s into the specified position in the

VC-4.

6 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.l Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8M

overhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Eachoverhead of an STM-1 interface occupies a 2Mtimeslot in the 8M signal.

l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indicationsignal to the PXC.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD, the MUX/DEMUX unit sends the service signal to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the pairedboard. The MUX/DEMUX unit selects a better signal for later processing.

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-3 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1A/IF1B

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow


l Processes the clock signal.l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8M

overhead signal.l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal

from the active PXC.



3-11

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

2 MUX/DEMUX unit(for SDH microwavesignal processing)

l Sets higher order path overheads.l Sets the AU pointer.l Sets multiplex section overheads.l Sets regenerator section overheads.l Performs scrambling.

2 MUX/DEMUX unit(for PDH microwavesignal processing)

l Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signal.l Sets PDH microwave frame overheads.l Performs scrambling.

3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.l Performs digital modulation.

4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.l Performs analog modulation.

5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmittedfrom the SCC.


Combines the ODU control signal, microwave servicesignal, and -48 V power supplies, and sends them to theIF cable.

Control Signal Processing FlowThe board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGAsoftware.


Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-5 IF1A front panel

IF1A

IF1A

ODU-PWR

OD

U

AC

T

BER

RM

T

STA

TSR

VLI

NKIF

WARNING-48V OUTPUT


!

PULL




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Figure 3-6 IF1B front panel

IF1B

IF1B

ODU-PWR

OD

U

AC

T

BER

RM

T

STA

TSR

VLI

NKIF

WARNING-48V OUTPUT


!

PULL

Indicators

Table 3-4 IF1A/IF1B indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.l The board is not created.l The board has no power

access.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

LINK On (green) The air link is normal.

On (red) The air link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is workingnormally.

On (red) The ODU has critical ormajor alarms.

On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.

Off The ODU is offline, or has nopower access.

On: 300 ms (yellow)Off: 300 ms

The actually received powerof the ODU is lower than thepower to be received.

BER On (yellow) The microwave bit errorsexceed the threshold.



3-13


Off The microwave bit errors arein the normal range.

RMT On (yellow) The remote system reports anRDI.

Off The remote system does notreport an RDI.

ACT On (green) The board is in the activestate (1+1 protection).The board is activated (noprotection).

Off The board is in the standbystate (1+1 protection).The board is not activated (noprotection).

Interfaces

Table 3-5 IF1A/IF1B interface description

Interface Description Type of connector Cable

IF IF port TNC IF Jumper

ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To move the switch, you need to first pull outthe switch lever partially. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switchis set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.

Labels

There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidancelabel on the front panel.

l The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. In this case, you need to wearprotective gloves before touching the board.

l The operation warning label suggests that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off beforethe IF cable is removed.

l The operation guidance label suggests that you must pull the switch lever outwards slightlybefore setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

NOTE

There may be no operation guidance label on the front panel of the board that were deliveredpreviously.

3.3.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the IF1A/IF1B can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Figure 3-7 Slots of the IF1A/IF1B in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

IF1A/IF1B IF1A/IF1B

IF1A/IF1B IF1A/IF1B

Table 3-6 Slot assigning principle of the IF1A/IF1B

Item Description

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 620

Slot 5 > slot 7 > slot 8 > slot 6

3.3.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radiowork mode, radio Link ID, wayside service attributes, ATPC attributes and J1 byte. The waysideservice attributes and J1 bytes apply to SDH microwave only. The other parameters apply toboth PDH and SDH microwaves.

Radio Work Mode

The IF board can operate in the following seven radio work modes.

Table 3-7 Radio work modes

Service Capacity Modulation Scheme Channel Spacing (MHz)

4xE1 QPSK 7

4xE1 16QAM 3.5

8xE1 QPSK 14 (13.75)

8xE1 16QAM 7

16xE1 QPSK 28 (27.5)



3-15


16xE1 16QAM 14 (13.75)

22xE1 32QAM 14 (13.75)

26xE1 64QAM 14 (13.75)

35xE1 16QAM 28 (27.5)

44xE1 32QAM 28 (27.5)

53xE1 64QAM 28 (27.5)

E3 QPSK 28 (27.5)

E3 16QAM 14 (13.75)

STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)

NOTE

l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.

l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the OptiXRTN 620. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.

Radio Link IDThe radio Link ID is an identification of the microwave link. The transmit end continuouslysends the radio Link ID byte, so that the receive end can learn that the transmit end is in a constantconnection state. If the receive end detects a mismatch of the radio Link ID, the MW_LIM alarmis reported on the corresponding IF port.

Wayside Service AttributesWhen the IF board works in the STM-1 mode, one wayside service can be transported by radio.The following are the two parameters of wayside services:

l 2M wayside Enable StatusThis parameter determines whether the NE enables the 2M wayside service. By default,the 2M wayside service is disabled.

l 2M wayside input boardThis parameter determines through which PXC the wayside service is accessed.

ATPC AttributesATPC is a technology that automatically adjusts the transmit power of the transmitter accordingto the attenuation of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end. The following are theparameters of ATPC:

l ATPC enable statusThis parameter determines whether the NE enables the ATPC function to control thetransmit power of the transmitter. By default, the ATPC function is disabled.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

l ATPC upper threshold

When the RSL at the receive end is higher than this parameter, the receive end notifies thetransmit end of reducing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwaveframe. The decrement depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

l ATPC lower threshold

When the RSL at the receive end is lower than this parameter, the receive end notifies thetransmit end of increasing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in themicrowave frame. The increment depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

l ATPC adjustment

This parameter determines the decrement/increment of an ATPC adjustment.

l Automatic ATPC threshold setting

This parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled,the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold do not take effect. Theequipment sets the ATPC thresholds automatically according to the IF modulation scheme.When this parameter is set to Disabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lowerthreshold are used.

NOTE

ATPC adjustment cannot exceed the range of the ODU transmit power.

J1 Byte

The board supports four modes, which are as follows:

l Single-byte mode

l 16-byte mode with CRC

l 16-byte mode without CRC

l 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3.3.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including baseband signal processingperformance of modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

IF performance

Table 3-8 IF performance

Item Performance

IF signal

Transmit frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

350



3-17

Item Performance

Receive frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

140

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal

Modulation mode ASK


5.5


10

Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Table 3-9 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Item Performance

Encoding mode l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH signalsl Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for

SDH signals

Adaptive time-domain equalizer forbaseband signals

Supported

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-10 Integrated system performance of the IF1A/IF1B

Item Description

IF1A IF1B

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 420 g 400 g

Power consumption < 12.2 W

3.4 IFXThe IFX is a cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) IF board.

3.4.1 Version Description




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

The functional version of the IFX is SL61.

3.4.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IFX receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to the ODUand the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IFX can cancel the cross-polarizationinterference in the IF signal. The IFX board supports the DC-C power distribution mode.

3.4.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one IF signal in the XPIC mode as an example to describethe working principle and signal flow of the IFX. The working principle and signal flow of theIFX in the non-XPIC mode are the same as the working principle and signal flow of the IF1A/IF1B.

3.4.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on thefront panel.

3.4.5 Valid SlotsThe IFX can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620.

3.4.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radiowork mode, radio Link ID, wayside service attributes, ATPC attributes, XPIC attribute, and J1byte.

3.4.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,XPIC performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.4.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IFX is SL61.

3.4.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IFX receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to the ODUand the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IFX can cancel the cross-polarizationinterference in the IF signal. The IFX board supports the DC-C power distribution mode.

IF Processingl Maps VC-4 service signals into SDH microwave frame signals.l Codes and decodes SDH microwave frame signals.l Modulates and demodulates SDH microwave frame signals.l Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals.l Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.l Cancels the cross-polarization interference in the IF signal in the XPIC mode.

NOTE

When the XPIC function and the co-channel dual-polarization (CCDP) function are used, the transmissioncapacity doubles under the same channel conditions.



3-19

Overhead Processingl Processes the overheads.l Processes the regenerator section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.l Processes the multiplex section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.l Supports the setting and querying of the J1/C2 byte in SDH microwave signals.l Supports the setting and querying of the Link ID.

NOTE

Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes. The first mode is called the pass-through mode.The path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values are not modified.The second mode is called the termination mode. When the path overheads are detected in the receivedirection, the transmit direction resets the overheads according to the default value of the board. By default,the board adopts the pass-through mode.

Pointer ProcessingProcesses the AU pointer in SDH microwave signals.

Protection Processingl Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.l Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.l Supports N+1 protection.l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels

in an SNCP group.l Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions.

NOTE

For the details of 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 1+1 SD, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemFeature Description.

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Provides rich alarms and performance events.l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and

setting the alarm threshold.l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performance

threshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.


Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop on the VC-4 path.l Supports the detecting of the board temperature.l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the boards.l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemIMaintenance Guide.


3.4.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one IF signal in the XPIC mode as an example to describethe working principle and signal flow of the IFX. The working principle and signal flow of theIFX in the non-XPIC mode are the same as the working principle and signal flow of the IF1A/IF1B.


Figure 3-8 Block diagram of the IFX working principle

PXC

IF IFprocessing

unit

Logicproces

singunit SCC

SCC

MUX/DEMUX

unit

MODEMunit

Combinerinterface

unit

PowerunitClock unit Power

unit

SCC

1+1HSB/FD/SDPaired boards

Backplane

Service bus


Microwaveservice signal ODU control signal


XPIC signal

XPIC Pairedboards

SMODEMunit



3-21


Table 3-11 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow




the SCC CPU.

3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of the service signal through theAGC circuit.

l Filters the signal and splits the signal into twochannels.– Performs A/D conversion for one filtered signal

and transmits the converted signal to the MODEMunit.

– Outputs the other filtered signal as the XPIC signal.l Performs A/D conversion for the XPIC signal from

the paired IFX and transmits the converted signal tothe MODEM unit.

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation by using the XPIC IFsignal from the paired IFX as a reference signal.

l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.l Performs FEC decoding and generates the





Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Synchronizes frames and detects the R_LOS andR_LOF alarms.

l Performs descrambling.l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the

corresponding alarms and performance events.l Checks the Link ID and generates the corresponding

alarms.l Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte





l Extracts the wayside service bytes to form another 2Moverhead signal and sends it to the logic processingunit.








NOTE




3-23


Table 3-12 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow




from the active PXC board.

2 MUX/DEMUX unit l Sets higher order path overheads.l Sets the AU pointer.l Sets multiplex section overheads.l Sets regenerator section overheads.l Performs scrambling.



5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmittedfrom the SCC board.





3.4.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on thefront panel.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-9 IFX front panel

IFX

IFX

ODU-PWR

IF

LIN

K

AC

T

OD

UR

MT

STA

TSR

VXP

IC

XPIC

OUTIN

WARNING-48V OUTPUT


!

PULL

Indicators

Table 3-13 IFX indicator description





access.





XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal isnormal.

On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.

Off The XPIC function isdisabled.







3-25










Interfaces

Table 3-14 IFX interface description

Interface Description Type ofconnector

Cable


XPIC IN XPIC input signal SMA XPIC cable

OUT XPIC output signal


NOTE


LabelsThere is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidancelabel on the front panel.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)




NOTE


3.4.5 Valid SlotsThe IFX can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620.

Figure 3-10 Slots of the IFX in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

IFX IFX

IFX IFX

Table 3-15 Slot assigning principle of the IFX

Item Description



3.4.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radiowork mode, radio Link ID, wayside service attributes, ATPC attributes, XPIC attribute, and J1byte.

Radio Work ModeThe IFX supports only one radio work mode.

Table 3-16 Radio work mode


STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)



3-27

NOTE

l 27.5 MHz is the channel spacing of the 18 GHz frequency band.

l The channel spacing described in the table is the minimum channel spacing supported by the equipment.The channel spacing larger than the value is also supported.


Wayside Service AttributesWhen the IF board works in the STM-1 mode, one wayside service can be transported on radio.The following are the two parameters of wayside services:

l 2M wayside Enable StatusThis parameter determines whether the NE enables the 2M wayside service. By default,the 2M wayside service is disabled.

l 2M wayside input boardThis parameter determines through which PXC the wayside service is accessed.

ATPC AttributesATPC is a technology that automatically adjusts the transmit power of the transmitter accordingto the attenuation of the RSL at the receive end. The following are the parameters of ATPC:


l ATPC upper thresholdWhen the RSL at the receive end is higher than this parameter, the receive end notifies thetransmit end of reducing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwaveframe. The decrement depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

l ATPC lower thresholdWhen the RSL at the receive end is lower than this parameter, the receive end notifies thetransmit end of increasing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in themicrowave frame. The increment depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

l ATPC adjustmentThis parameter determines the decrement/increment of an ATPC adjustment.

l Automatic ATPC threshold settingThis parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled,the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold do not take effect. Theequipment sets the ATPC thresholds automatically according to the IF modulation scheme.When this parameter is set to Disabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lowerthreshold are used.

NOTE





Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

XPIC AttributesThe XPIC enabled parameter can be set to enabled or disabled.

l When the XPIC function is enabled, the IFX splits the received IF signal, outputs one signalto the XPIC OUT port, and performs XPIC by using the reference IF signal from the XPICIN port.

l When the XPIC function is disabled, the XPIC IN port and XPIC OUT port must be loopedback by using an XPIC cable.

J1 ByteThe board supports four modes, which are as follows:l Single-byte model 16-byte mode with CRCl 16-byte mode without CRCl 64-byte modeBy default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3.4.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,XPIC performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

IF performance


Item Performance

IF signal


350


140

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal

Modulation mode ASK


5.5


10



3-29

Baseband Signals Processing Performance of the Modem

Table 3-18 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem

Item Description

Encoding mode Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding


Supported

XPIC Performance

Table 3-19 XPIC performance

Item Description

Cross polarizationimprovement factor (XPIF)

19 dB


Table 3-20 Integrated system performance of the IFX

Item Description


Weight 450 g


3.5 IF0A/IF0BThe IF0A/IF0B is the PDH intermediate frequency board.



3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple and signal flow of the IF0A/IF0B.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


3.5.5 Valid SlotsThe IF0A/IF0B can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620.

3.5.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radiowork mode, radio Link ID, and ATPC attributes.

3.5.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.



IF Processingl Multiplexes 2xE1/5xE1/10xE1/16xE1 service signals into PDH microwave frame signals.l Codes and decodes PDH microwave frame signals.l Modulates and demodulates PDH microwave frame signals.l Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals.l Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.

Overhead Processingl Processes the overheads of the PDH microwave signals.l Supports the setting and querying of the Link ID.

Protection Processingl Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.l Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.

NOTE

l For the details of 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 1+1 SD, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio TransmissionSystem Feature Description.






3-31


Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the IF port.l Supports the detecting of the board temperature.l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the boards.l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

NOTE



3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple and signal flow of the IF0A/IF0B.


Figure 3-11 Block diagram of the IF0A/IF0B working principle

Backplane

PXCIF IF

processingunit

Logicprocessing

unit SCC

SCC

Service bus


Microwaveservice signal

MUX/DEMUX

unit

MODEMunit

Combinerinterface

unit

Powerunit

SMODEMunit

Clockunit

Logiccontrol unit

SCC

ODU control signal

Paired boards





Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


Table 3-21 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF0A/IF0B

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow




the SCC CPU.



4 MODEM unit l Performs digital modulation.l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.l Performs FEC decoding and generates the


5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects the PDH microwave frame header andgenerates the corresponding alarms and performanceevents.

l Verifies the check code and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Detects the Link ID and generates the correspondingalarms.


l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytesfrom the PDH microwave frame to form a 2Moverhead signal and sends it to the logic processingunit.

l Maps the E1 signal in the PDH microwave frame intothe specified position in the VC-4.




l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indicationsignal to the PXC board.



3-33

NOTE



Table 3-22 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF0A/IF0B

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow





2 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal.l Sets PDH microwave frame overheads.l Performs scrambling.



5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmittedfrom the SCC board.









Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-12 IF0A front panel

IF0A

IF0A

ODU-PWR

OD

U

AC

T

BER

RM

T

STA

TSR

VLI

NKIF

WARNING-48V OUTPUT


!

PULL

Figure 3-13 IF0B front panel

IF0B

IF0B

ODU-PWR

OD

U

AC

T

BER

RM

T

STA

TSR

VLI

NKIF

WARNING-48V OUTPUT


!

PULL

Indicators

Table 3-23 IF0A/IF0B indicator description





access.










3-35













Interfaces

Table 3-24 IF0A/IF0B interface description

Interface Description Type of connector Cable



NOTE





Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Labels





NOTE


3.5.5 Valid SlotsThe IF0A/IF0B can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620.

Figure 3-14 Slots of the IF0A/IF0B in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

IF0A/IF0B IF0A/IF0B

IF0A/IF0B IF0A/IF0B

Table 3-25 Slot assigning principle of the IF0A/IF0B

Item Description



3.5.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radiowork mode, radio Link ID, and ATPC attributes.

Radio Work Mode

The IF0A/IF0B can operate in the following four radio work modes.



3-37

Table 3-26 Radio work modes


2xE1 QPSK 3.5

5xE1 QPSK 7

10xE1 QPSK 14 (13.75)

16xE1 QPSK 28 (27.5)

NOTE

l 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are the channel spacings of the 18 GHz frequency band.

l The channel spacing described in the table is the minimum channel spacing supported by the equipment.The channel spacing larger than the value is also supported.

l The 2xE1 work mode does not support 1+1 protection.











Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

NOTE


3.5.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

IF performance


Item Performance

IF signal


350


140

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal

Modulation mode ASK


5.5


10



Item Description

Encoding mode Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding


Supported



3-39


Table 3-29 Integrated system performance of the IF0A/IF0B

Item Description


Weight 520 g


3.6 IFH2The IFH2 is a hybrid IF board.

3.6.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IFH2 is SL61.

3.6.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IFH2 receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to theODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IFH2 supports the hybrid transmissionof E1 services and Ethernet services. The IFH2 board supports the DC-I power distributionmode.

3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one hybrid microwave IF signal as an example todescribe the working principle and signal flow of the IFH2. When the IFH2 works in pure PDHmicrowave mode, the IFH2 need not process Ethernet services.

3.6.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF port, a GE port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

3.6.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the IFH2 can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8.

3.6.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radiowork mode, radio Link ID, ATPC attributes, AM attributes, and Ethernet parameters.

3.6.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,Ethernet interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.6.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IFH2 is SL61.

3.6.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IFH2 receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to theODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IFH2 supports the hybrid transmission




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

of E1 services and Ethernet services. The IFH2 board supports the DC-I power distributionmode.

IF Processingl Supports the Hybrid microwave frame and supports the pure transmission of the E1 or

Ethernet signals and the hybrid transmission of the E1 and Ethernet signals.

l Supports the adaptive modulation (AM).

l Maps service signals into microwave frame signals.

l Codes and decodes microwave frame signals.

l Modulates and demodulates microwave frame signals.

l Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals.

l Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.

Ethernet Service Processing

The front panel of the IFH2 has a GE electrical interface. The GE electrical interface supportsthe following port functions:

l Supports the setting and querying of the working modes of the Ethernet ports. The workingmodes supported are 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.

l Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with a maximum frame length of 1966bytes.

l Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

The GE electrical interface also supports the following Ethernet QoS functions:

l Supports the flow classification function that complies with IEEE 802.1p.

l Schedules the queues of four priority levels in the strict-priority (SP) mode.

Overhead Processingl Processes the overheads of the microwave signals.

l Supports the setting and querying of the Link ID.

Protection Processingl Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.

l Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.

NOTE

When the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is configured in the Hybrid microwave, the two IFH2 boards mustwork with one EMS6 board. As shown in Figure 3-15, the GE ports of the main and standby IFH2 boardsare connected to two Ethernet ports of the EMS6 boards through network cables. The two Ethernet portsof the EMS6 board must be configured as a Link Aggregation Group.

For the details of 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 1+1 SD, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemFeature Description.



3-41

Figure 3-15 Cable connection for the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection in the Hybrid microwave

FAN

Slot 20

IFH2

IFH2

IDU 620

EMS6

Slot 6

Slot 4

Slot 2

Slot 8

PXC

PXC

Slot 5

Slot 3

Slot 1

Slot 7

To the externalequipment

SCC

Network cable





Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the IF port.

l Supports the PRBS bit error test at the IF port.

l Supports inloop in the PHY layer of Ethernet ports.





NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System MaintenanceGuide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the services arenot affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board isinitialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services canbe interrupted.

3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one hybrid microwave IF signal as an example todescribe the working principle and signal flow of the IFH2. When the IFH2 works in pure PDHmicrowave mode, the IFH2 need not process Ethernet services.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


Figure 3-16 Block diagram of the IFH2 working principleBackplane

PXC

IFIF

processingunit

Logicprocessing

unit SCC

SCC

Service bus


Microwave servicesignal

MUX/DEMUX

unit

MODEMunit

Combinerinterface

unit

Powerunit

SMODEMunit

Clockunit

Logiccontrol unit

SCC

ODU control signal

Pairedboard

Channel switching signal

Ethernet servicesignal

GE

Ethernetprocessing

unit


Table 3-30 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFH2

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow




the SCC CPU.





3-43

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.l Performs FEC decoding and generates the


5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects the hybrid microwave frame header andgenerates the corresponding alarms and performanceevents.

l Verifies the check code in the hybrid microwave frameand generates the corresponding alarms andperformance events.

l Detects the Link ID in the hybrid microwave frameand generates the corresponding alarms andperformance events.

l Detects the changes in the ATPC message in thehybrid microwave frame and the changes in themicrowave RDI, and reports the changes to the SCCthrough the control bus.

l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, SSM byte, andDCC bytes from the hybrid microwave frame to forma 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logicprocessing unit.

l Maps the E1 signal in the hybrid microwave frame intothe specified position in the VC-4 and sends the VC-4signal to the logic processing unit.

l Sends the Ethernet service signal in the hybridmicrowave frame to the Ethernet processing unit.





Ethernet processingunit

Classifies Ethernet service packets into four queues thathave different priorities according to IEEE 802.1p.Schedules the services in strict-priority (SP) mode andsends the services through the Ethernet interface.

NOTE





Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


Table 3-31 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFH2

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow





Ethernet processingunit

l Performs Ethernet performance counting for theaccessed FE/GE signal.

l Classifies the packets into four queues that havedifferent priorities according to IEEE 802.1p andschedules the services in SP mode.

l Sends the Ethernet signals to the MUX/DEMUX unit.

2 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal.l Sets hybrid microwave frame overheads.l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and

microwave frame overheads to form microwaveframes.



5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmittedfrom the SCC.







3-45

3.6.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF port, a GE port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-17 IFH2 front panel

IFH

2

IFH

2

OD

U

AC

T

BER

RM

T

STA

TSR

VLI

NKIF

ODU-PWR

GE

WARNING-48V OUTPUT


!

PULL

Indicators

Table 3-32 IFH2 indicator description


STAT On (green) The board is working normally.


Off l The board is not working.l The board is not created.l The board has no power access.


On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in theservices.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in theservices.

Off The services are not configured.



ODU On (green) The ODU is working normally.

On (red) The ODU has critical or major alarms.


Off The ODU is offline, or has no power access.


The actually received power of the ODU islower than the power to be received.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


BER On (yellow) The microwave bit errors exceed thethreshold.

Off The microwave bit errors are in the normalrange.

RMT On (yellow) The remote system reports an RDI.

Off The remote system does not report an RDI.

ACT On (green) The board is in the active state (1+1protection).The board is activated (no protection).

Off The board is in the standby state (1+1protection).The board is not activated (no protection).

Interfaces

Table 3-33 IFH2 interface description

Interface Description Type ofconnector

Cable



GE GE electrical port RJ-45 Network cable

NOTE


The GE port of the IFH2 supports the MDI, MDI-X, and autosensing mode. For the front viewand pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector, see Figure 3-18 and refer to Table 3-34 and Table3-35.

Figure 3-18 RJ-45 front view

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1



3-47

Table 3-34 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A(+)

2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A(-)

3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B(+)

4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C(+)

5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C(-)

6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B(-)

7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D(+)

8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D(-)

Table 3-35 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode












Issue 04 (2010-10-30)





The GE port has two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table 3-36.

Table 3-36 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description


Green indicator (LINK) On The link is normal.

Off The link fails.

Yellow indicator (ACT) On or flashing The port is transmitting orreceiving data.

Off The port is not transmitting orreceiving data.

Labels





NOTE


3.6.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the IFH2 can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Figure 3-19 Slots of the IFH2 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

IFH2 IFH2

IFH2 IFH2



3-49

Table 3-37 Slot assigning principle of the IFH2

Item Description


Slot 5 > Slot 7 > Slot 8 > Slot 6

3.6.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radiowork mode, radio Link ID, ATPC attributes, AM attributes, and Ethernet parameters.

Radio Work Mode

Table 3-38 Radio work modes in the case of hybrid microwave frames

Channel Spacing(MHz)a, b

ModulationScheme

Service Capacity(Mbit/s)

Maximum Numberof E1s in servicec

7 QPSK 10 5

7 16QAM 20 10

7 32QAM 25 12

7 64QAM 32 15

7 128QAM 38 18

7 256QAM 44 21

14 (13.75) QPSK 20 10

14 (13.75) 16QAM 42 20

14 (13.75) 32QAM 51 24

14 (13.75) 64QAM 66 31

14 (13.75) 128QAM 78 37

14 (13.75) 256QAM 90 43

28 (27.5) QPSK 42 20

28 (27.5) 16QAM 84 40

28 (27.5) 32QAM 105 50

28 (27.5) 64QAM 133 64

28 (27.5) 128QAM 158 75




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Channel Spacing(MHz)a, b

ModulationScheme

Service Capacity(Mbit/s)

Maximum Numberof E1s in servicec

28 (27.5) 256QAM 183 75

56 QPSK 84 40

56 16QAM 168 75

56 32QAM 208 75

56 64QAM 265 75

56 128QAM 313 75

56 256QAM 363 75

40d 64QAM - 75

NOTE

l a: The channel spacings 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.

l b: The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the OptiXRTN 620. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.

l c: The E1 services consume the corresponding bandwidth of the service capacity. After the E1 servicecapacity is deducted from the service capacity, the remaining bandwidth of the service capacity can beused for the Ethernet services.

l d: This modes are the super PDH modes that do not support the transmission of Ethernet services.








3-51



NOTE


AM AttributesThe AM is a technology used to automatically adjust the modulation scheme based on the qualityof channels. The AM attributes include the following parameters:

l AM Enable StatusThis parameter determines whether the board enables the AM function to perform adaptivemodulation. This parameter can be set to Enable or Disable.

l IF Channel BandwidthThis parameter determines the channel spacing used in the case of adaptive modulation.This parameter can be set to 7 MHz, 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz.

l Modulation mode of the assurred AM capacityThis parameter specifies the lowest-gain modulation mode in the case of adaptivemodulation. This parameter can be set to QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, or256QAM.

l Modulation mode of the full AM capacityThis parameter specifies the highest-gain modulation mode in the case of adaptivemodulation. This parameter can be set to QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, or256QAM.

l E1 capacityThis parameter specifies the number of E1s in the hybrid working mode. The number ofE1s must not exceed the maximum number of E1s when the committed-capacitymodulation scheme is used.

Ethernet ParametersThe parameters that you may frequently set for the GE port of the IFH2 are as follows:

l Basic attributesl Flow control

The basic attributes are applicable to all Ethernet services and include the following threeparameters: port enabled, working mode, and maximum frame length.

l Port enabledThis parameter is used to control the enabled/disabled status of Ethernet ports. By default,this parameter is set to disabled.

l Working mode




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

There are five working modes: 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex andauto-negotiation. Set the working mode of the equipment on the local side depending onthe working mode of the equipment on the opposite side. For the setting suggestions, referto the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

The board supports the following flow control modes: autonegotiation flow control mode andnon-autonegotiation flow control mode. By default, the flow control mode is set to the disabledmode. The flow control parameter should be set depending on the flow control parameter of theequipment on the opposite side.

l The autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:

– Disabled

The port does not work in the autonegotiation flow control mode.

– Enable symmetric flow control

The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the receivedPAUSE frames.

l The non-autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:

– Disabled

The port does not work in the non-autonegotiation flow control mode.



3.6.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,Ethernet interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

IF performance


Item Performance

IF signal


350


140

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal

Modulation mode ASK


5.5



3-53

Item Performance


10



Item Description

Encoding mode Low-density parity check code (LDPC) encoding

Adaptivetimedomainequalizer forbaseband signals

Supported

10/100/1000BASE-T(X) Interface Performance

The 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface is compliant with IEEE 802.3. The following tableprovides the primary performance.

Table 3-41 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)100 (100BASE-TX)1000 (1000BASE-T)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)

Interface type RJ-45


Table 3-42 Integrated system performance of the IFH2

Item Description


Weight 580 g




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Item Description


3.7 SL4The SL4 is an SDH single-port STM-4 board.

3.7.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SL4 is SL61.

3.7.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SL4 receives and transmits 1xSTM-4 optical signals.

3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes the working principle and signal flow of the SL4.

3.7.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, STM-4 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.

3.7.5 Valid SlotsThe SL4 can be installed in slots 6 and 8 of the IDU 620.

3.7.6 Board Feature CodeThe type of the SFP module equipped on the SL1/SD1 can be identified by the board featurecode that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the barcode.

3.7.7 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are the J0 byte and J1 byte.

3.7.8 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including STM-4 optical interface performance,board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.7.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SL4 is SL61.

3.7.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SL4 receives and transmits 1xSTM-4 optical signals.

Optical Interface Specificationsl The SL4 provides S-4.1, L-4.1, or L-4.2 optical interfaces.l The optical interface complies with ITU-T G.957.

Optical Module Specificationsl Adopts the SFP optical modules and provides LC fiber connectors.l Supports the setting of turning on or shutting down the laser.l Supports the querying of the technical parameters of the optical modules.



3-55

l Supports the reporting of the performance events related to the transmit optical power andreceive optical power.

l Supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.

NOTEThe ALS functions as follows:

1. When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500ms, the corresponding laser at the transmit port is automatically shut down.

2. The laser starts to launch an alternative laser pulse. The light is emitted for 2s after a 60s interval.

3. When the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser returns to the normal working state and emits lightcontinuously.

Overhead Processingl Processes the regenerator section overheads of the STM-4 signals.l Processes the multiplex section overheads of the STM-4 signals.l Processes the higher order path overheads of the STM-4 signals.l Supports the setting and querying of the J0/J1/C2 byte.

NOTE

Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes. The first mode is called the pass-through mode.The path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values are not modified.The second mode is called the termination mode. When the path overheads are detected in the receivedirection, the transmit direction resets the overheads according to the default value of the board. By default,the board adopts the pass-through mode.

Pointer Processing

Processes AU pointers.

Protection Processingl Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels

in an SNCP group.l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels

in a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels

in a linear MSP group.l Supports the setting of the SNCP switching conditions.l Supports the setting of the switching conditions for a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.l Supports the setting of the linear MSP switching conditions.

NOTE

For the details of SNCP, two-fiber bidirectional shared MSP ring, and linear MSP, refer to the OptiX RTN620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.


setting the alarm threshold.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


NOTE

For the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the optical interface.

l Supports outloop on the VC-4 path.




NOTE



3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes the working principle and signal flow of the SL4.


Figure 3-20 Block diagram of the SL4 working principle

Backplane

Logiccontrol

unit

PXCSTM-4

STM-4

O/Econversion

unit

Overheadprocessing

unit

Logicprocessing

unit SCC

SCC

Service busOverhead bus Control bus

STM-4 signal

Paired board



3-57


Table 3-43 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL4

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 O/E conversion unit l Regenerates STM-4 optical signals.l Detects the R_LOS alarm.l Converts the STM-4 optical signals into electrical

signals.

2 Overhead processingunit

l Restores the clock signal.l Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS and

R_LOF alarms.l Performs descrambling.l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the

corresponding alarms and performance events.l Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte









overhead signal and sends it to the SCC.l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication

signal to the PXC.

NOTE

If a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring is configured, the overhead processing unit sends the overhead byteto the paired SL4 to realize the overhead pass-through function.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


Table 3-44 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL4

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow







3 O/E conversion unit l Converts the electrical signals into optical signals.




Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-21 SL4 front panel

SL4 CLASS 1

LASERPRODUCTST

ATS

RV

LOS

TX RX

SL4



3-59

Indicators

Table 3-45 SL4 indicator description




Off The board is not working, isnot created, or has no poweraccess.





LOS On (red) The optical interface of theSL4 reports the R_LOSalarm.

Off The optical interface of theSL4 has no R_LOS alarm.

Interfaces

Table 3-46 SL4 interface description

Interface Description Type ofConnector

Cable

TX Transmit port of the STM-4 opticalinterface

LC (SFP) Fiber jumper

RX Receive port of the STM-4 opticalinterface

LabelsThere is a laser safety class label on the front panel.

The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS1. This means that the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than10 dBm (10 mW).




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

3.7.5 Valid SlotsThe SL4 can be installed in slots 6 and 8 of the IDU 620.

Figure 3-22 Slots of the SL4 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

SL4

SL4


Table 3-47 Board feature code of the SL4

Board Feature Code Type of the OpticalModule

Part Number of theOptical Module

01 S-4.1 34060277

02 L-4.1 34060280

03 L-4.2 34060284


J0 ByteThe board supports three modes, which are as follows:l Single-byte model 16-byte mode with CRCl 16-byte mode without CRCBy default, the board does not monitor the received J0 byte, that is, the J0 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J0 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

J1 ByteThe board supports four modes, which are as follows:



3-61

l Single-byte model 16-byte mode with CRCl 16-byte mode without CRCl 64-byte modeBy default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.


STM-4 Optical Interface PerformanceThe performance of the STM-4 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957. The followingtable provides the primary performance.

Table 3-48 STM-4 optical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 622080

Classification code S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2

Fiber type Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Transmission distance (km) 15 40 80

Operating wavelength (nm) 1274 to 1356 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580

Mean launched power (dBm) -15 to -8 -3 to 2 -3 to 2

Minimum receiver sensitivity(dBm)

-28 -28 -28

Minimum overload (dBm) -8 -8 -8

Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 10 10

NOTE

SDH optical interface boards use SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different typesof SFP modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


Table 3-49 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SL4

Item Description


Weight 290 g


3.8 SL1/SD1The SL1 is an SDH single-port STM-1 board. The SD1 is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board.

3.8.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SL1/SD1 is SL61.

3.8.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SL1 receives and transmits 1xSTM-1 optical signals. The SD1 receives and transmits2xSTM-1 optical signals.

3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the SL1/SD1.


3.8.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the SL1/SD1 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.




3.8.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SL1/SD1 is SL61.

3.8.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SL1 receives and transmits 1xSTM-1 optical signals. The SD1 receives and transmits2xSTM-1 optical signals.



3-63

Optical Interface Specificationsl The SL1/SD1 provides Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2 optical interfaces.l The optical interface complies with ITU-T G.957.

Optical Module Specificationsl Adopts the SFP optical modules and provides LC fiber connectors.l Supports the setting of turning on or shutting down the laser.l Supports the querying of the technical parameters of the optical modules.l Supports the reporting of the performance events related to the transmit optical power and

receive optical power.l Supports the ALS function.

NOTEThe ALS functions as follows:

1. When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500ms, the corresponding laser at the transmit port is automatically shut down.

2. The laser starts to launch an alternative laser pulse. The light is emitted for 2s after a 60s interval.

3. When the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser returns to the normal working state and emits lightcontinuously.

Overhead Processingl Processes the regenerator section overheads of the STM-1 signals.l Processes the multiplex section overheads of the STM-1 signals.l Processes the higher order path overheads of the STM-1 signals.l Supports the setting and querying of the J0/J1/C2 byte.


Pointer Processing



in an SNCP group.l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels

in a linear MSP group.l Supports the setting of the SNCP switching conditions.l Supports the setting of the linear MSP switching conditions.

NOTEFor the details of SNCP and linear MSP, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)





Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the optical interface.l Supports outloop on the VC-4 path.l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

NOTE



3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the SL1/SD1.


Figure 3-23 Block diagram of the SL1/SD1 working principle

Backplane

Logiccontrol

unit

PXCSTM-1

STM-1

O/Econversion

unit

Overheadprocessing

unit

Logicprocessing

unit SCC

SCC


STM-1 signal



3-65


Table 3-50 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1/SD1

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 O/E conversion unit l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.l Detects the R_LOS alarm.l Converts the STM-1 optical signals into electrical

signals.


















Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1/SD1

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow


l Processes clock.l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8M





3 O/E conversion unit l Converts the electrical signals into optical signals.




Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-24 SL1 front panel

SL1 CLASS 1

LASERPRODUCTST

ATSR

VLO

S1

TX1 RX1

SL1

Figure 3-25 SD1 front panel

SD

1

SD

1 CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

STAT

LOS2

SRV

LOS1

TX2 RX2TX1 RX1



3-67

Indicators

Table 3-52 SL1/SD1 indicator description





access.





LOS1 On (red) The first optical interface ofthe SL1/SD1 reports theR_LOS alarm.

Off The first optical interface ofthe SL1/SD1 has no R_LOSalarm.

LOS2 On (red) The second optical interfaceof the SD1 reports theR_LOS alarm.

Off The second optical interfaceof the SD1 has no R_LOSalarm.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Interfaces

Table 3-53 SL1 interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

TX1 Transmit port of anSTM-1 opticalinterface


RX1 Receive port of anSTM-1 opticalinterface

Table 3-54 SD1 interface description


TX1 Transmit port of thefirst STM-1 opticalinterface


RX1 Receive port of thefirst STM-1 opticalinterface

TX2 Transmit port of thesecond STM-1optical interface

LC (SFP)

RX2 Receive port of thesecond STM-1optical interface

LabelsThere is a laser safety class label on the front panel.

The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS1. This means that the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than10 dBm (10 mW).

3.8.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the SL1/SD1 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Figure 3-26 Slots of the SL1/SD1 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

SL1/SD1 SL1/SD1

SL1/SD1 SL1/SD1

SL1/SD1



3-69

Table 3-55 Slot assigning principle of the SL1/SD1

Item Description


Slot 4 > slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5


Table 3-56 Board feature code of the SL1/SD1

Board Feature Code Type of the OpticalModule

Part Number of theOptical Module

01 Ie-1 34060287

02 S-1.1 34060276

03 L-1.1 34060281

04 L-1.2 34060282


J0 ByteThe board supports three modes, which are as follows:l Single-byte model 16-byte mode with CRCl 16-byte mode without CRCBy default, the board does not monitor the received J0 byte, that is, the J0 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J0 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

J1 ByteThe board supports four modes, which are as follows:l Single-byte model 16-byte mode with CRC




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

l 16-byte mode without CRCl 64-byte modeBy default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.


STM-1 Optical Interface PerformanceThe performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957. The followingtable provides the primary performance.

Table 3-57 STM-1 optical interface performance

Item Performance


Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2

Fiber type Multi-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Transmission distance(km)

2 15 40 80

Operating wavelength(nm)

1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580

Mean launched power(dBm)

-19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

Receiver minimumsensitivity (dBm)

-30 -28 -34 -34

Minimum overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10

Minimum extinction ratio(dB)

10 8.2 10 10

NOTE

SDH optical interface boards use SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different typesof SFP modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.



3-71


Table 3-58 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SL1/SD1

Item Description

SL1 SD1


Weight 290 g 300 g

Power consumption < 3 W < 3.9 W

3.9 SLE/SDEThe SLE is an SDH single-port electrical STM-1 board and the SDE is an SDH dual-portelectrical STM-1 board.

3.9.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SLE/SDE is SL61.

3.9.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SLE receives and transmits 1xSTM-1 electrical signals. The SDE receives and transmits2xSTM-1 electrical signals.

3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the SLE/SDE.

3.9.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and STM-1 electrical interfaces on the front panel.

3.9.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the SLE/SDE can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.


3.9.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including STM-1 electrical interfaceperformance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.9.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SLE/SDE is SL61.

3.9.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SLE receives and transmits 1xSTM-1 electrical signals. The SDE receives and transmits2xSTM-1 electrical signals.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Overhead Processingl Processes the regenerator section overheads of the STM-1 signals.

l Processes the multiplex section overheads of the STM-1 signals.

l Processes the higher order path overheads of the STM-1 signals.

l Supports the setting and querying of the J0/J1/C2 byte.


Pointer Processing



in an SNCP group.

l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channelsin a linear MSP group.

l Supports the setting of the SNCP switching conditions.

l Supports the setting of the linear MSP switching conditions.

NOTEFor the details of SNCP and linear MSP, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.





Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the electrical interface.

l Supports outloop on the VC-4 path.






3-73

NOTE



3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the SLE/SDE.


Figure 3-27 Block diagram of the SLE/SDE working principle

Backplane

Logiccontrol

unit

PXCLine

interfaceunit

Overheadprocessing

unit

SCC

Service bus Control bus

Codecunit

Logicprocessing

unit

STM-1

STM-1

STM-1 signalOverhead bus

SCC


Table 3-59 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SLE/SDE

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Line interface unit l The external STM-1 electrical signals are coupled bythe transformer and then are sent to the board.

2 CODEC unit l Equalizes the received signals.l Detects the R_LOS alarm.l Performs CMI decoding.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow
















Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SLE/SDE

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow


l Processes clock.l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8M





3-75

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow



3 Codec unit l Performs CMI coding.

4 Line interface unit l The STM-1 electrical signals are coupled by thetransformer and then are sent to the external cable.



3.9.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and STM-1 electrical interfaces on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-28 SLE front panelS

LE

SLE

STAT

SRV

R1 T1

Figure 3-29 SDE front panel

SD

E

SD

EST

ATSR

V

R1 T1 R2 T2




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Indicators

Table 3-61 SLE/SDE indicator description





access.





Interfaces

Table 3-62 SLE interface description


T Transmit port of anSTM-1 electricalinterface

SMB STM-1e cable

R Receive port of anSTM-1 electricalinterface

Table 3-63 SDE interface description


T1 Transmit port of thefirst STM-1electrical interface

SMB STM-1e cable



3-77


R1 Receive port of thefirst STM-1electrical interface

T2 Transmit port of thesecond STM-1electrical interface

SMB

R2 Receive port of thesecond STM-1electrical interface

3.9.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the SLE/SDE can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Figure 3-30 Slots of the SLE/SDE in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

SLE/SDE SLE/SDE

SLE/SDE SLE/SDE

SLE/SDE

Table 3-64 Slot assigning principle of the SLE/SDE

Item Description

Slot assignment priority in the caseof the IDU 620



J0 ByteThe board supports three modes, which are as follows:l Single-byte model 16-byte mode with CRCl 16-byte mode without CRCBy default, the board does not monitor the received J0 byte, that is, the J0 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J0 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

J1 ByteThe board supports four modes, which are as follows:l Single-byte model 16-byte mode with CRCl 16-byte mode without CRCl 64-byte modeBy default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3.9.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including STM-1 electrical interfaceperformance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

STM-1 Electrical Interface PerformanceThe performance of the STM-1 electrical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. Thefollowing table provides the primary performance.

Table 3-65 STM-1 electrical interface performance

Item Performance


Code pattern CMI

Wire pair in eachtransmission direction

One coaxial wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 75


Table 3-66 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SLE/SDE

Item Description

SLE SDE


Weight 300 g 330 g

Power consumption < 4.2 W < 4.9 W



3-79

3.10 PL3The PL3 is a 3xE3/T3 tributary board.

3.10.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the PL3 is SL61.

3.10.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PL3 receives and transmits 3xE3/T3 signals.

3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one E3/T3 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the PL3.

3.10.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and E3 ports on the front panel.

3.10.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the PL3 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

3.10.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameter that you may frequently set is the J1 byte.

3.10.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including E3 port performance, boardmechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.10.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the PL3 is SL61.

3.10.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PL3 receives and transmits 3xE3/T3 signals.

Service Signal Processingl Supports the setting and querying of the type of the accessed service signal by the software

(E3 or T3).

l Supports the setting and querying of the input/output equalization of the T3 service signal.

Overhead and Pointer Processingl Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-3 level.

l Supports the querying of the J1 and C2 bytes.

l Supports the setting of the J1 and C2 bytes.

Clock Function

Supports the first and third E3/T3 signals to be extracted as the tributary clock source.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the E3/T3 tributary.

l Supports the PRBS 15 test.



NOTE



3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one E3/T3 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the PL3.


Figure 3-31 Block diagram of the PL3 working principle

PXC

E1/T3

E1/T3

Lineinterface

unit

Mapping/Demapping

unit

SCC

Service bus Control bus E1 signal

Codecunit

Logicprocessing

unit

Backplane

Logiccontrol

unit


Table 3-67 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the PL3

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Line interface unit l The external E3/T3 signal is coupled by thetransformer and then is sent to the board.



3-81

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

2 Codec unit l Equalizes the received signal.l Restores the clock signal.l Detects the T_ALOS alarm.l Performs HDB3 decoding (in the case of E3 signals)

or B3ZS decoding (in the case of T3 signals).

3 Mapping/Demapping unit

l Asynchronously maps the signal into C-3.l Processes path overheads and forms the signal to be

VC-3.l Processes pointers and forms the signal to be TU-3.l One TU-3 is multiplexed into one TUG-3.l Three TU-3s are performed with byte interleaving and

are multiplexed into one C-4.l C-4 is added with higher order path overheads and the

VC-4 is formed.




Table 3-68 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the PL3

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow


l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.


l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.l Demultiplexes one TU-3 from one TUG-3.l Processes the TU pointer and demultiplexes one VC-3

from one TU-3.l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects the

corresponding alarms and performance events.l Extracts E3/T3 signals.

3 Codec unit l Performs HDB3 coding (in the case of E3 signals) orB3ZS coding (in the case of T3 signals).

4 Line interface unit l The E3/T3 signal is coupled by the transformer andthen is sent to the external cable.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Control Signal Processing Flow

The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.



Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-32 PL3 front panel

PL3

PL3

STAT

SR

V

R1 T1 R2 T2 R3 T3

Indicators

Table 3-69 PL3 indicator description











3-83

Interfaces

Table 3-70 PL3 interface description


T1 Transmit port of thefirst E3/T3 electricalinterface

SMB E3/T3 cable

R1 Receive port of thefirst E3/T3 electricalinterface

T2 Transmit port of thesecond E3/T3electrical interface

SMB

R2 Receive port of thesecond E3/T3electrical interface

T3 Transmit port of thethird E3/T3 electricalinterface

SMB

R3 Receive port of thethird E3/T3 electricalinterface

3.10.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the PL3 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Figure 3-33 Slots of the PL3 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

PL3 PL3

PL3 PL3

PL3

Table 3-71 Slot assigning principle of the PL3

Item description


slot 4 > Slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


J1 Byte

The board supports four modes, which are as follows:

l Single-byte mode


l 16-byte mode without CRC

l 64-byte mode



E3/T3 Interface Performance

The performance of the E3/T3 interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The following tableprovides the primary performance.

Table 3-72 E3/T3 interface performance

Item Performance

E3 T3

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 34368 44736

Code pattern HDB3 B3ZS



Impedance (ohm) 75


Table 3-73 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PL3

Item Description

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth xheight)



3-85

Item Description

Weight 310 g


3.11 PO1/PH1/PD1The PO1 is an 8xE1 tributary board. The PH1 is a 16xE1 tributary board.The PD1 is a 32xE1tributary board.

3.11.1 Version DescriptionThe PO1 has two functional versions: SL61PO1 and SL62PO1. The functional version of thePH1/PD1 is SL61.

3.11.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PO1 receives and transmits 8xE1 signals. The PH1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals.ThePD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.

3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the PO1/PH1/PD1.


3.11.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the PO1/PH1 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

3.11.6 Board Feature CodeThe interface impedance of a PO1/PH1/PD1 can be identified by the board feature code of thebar code. The board feature code is the number after the board name of the bar code.



3.11.1 Version DescriptionThe PO1 has two functional versions: SL61PO1 and SL62PO1. The functional version of thePH1/PD1 is SL61.

Table 3-74 Differences between SL61PO1 and SL62PO1

Item SL61PO1 SL62PO1

Connector type of E1interface

DB44 RJ-45

E1 interface impedance 75 ohm or 120 ohm 120 ohm




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

3.11.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PO1 receives and transmits 8xE1 signals. The PH1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals.ThePD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.

Overhead and Pointer Processingl Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-12 level.l Supports the querying of the J2 and V5 bytes.l Supports the setting of the J2 and V5 byte.

Clock Functionsl Supports the retiming function of E1 signals.l Supports the first and fifth E1 signals to be extracted as the tributary clock source.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the E1 tributary.l Supports the PRBS 15 test.l Supports warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

NOTE



3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the PO1/PH1/PD1.


Figure 3-34 Block diagram of the PO1/PH1/PD1 working principle

Logiccontrol

unit

PXC

E1

E1

Lineinterface

unit

Mapping/Demapping

unit

SCC

Service bus Control bus E1 signal

Codecunit

Logicprocessing

unit

Backplane



3-87


Table 3-75 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the PO1/PH1/PD1

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Line interface unit l The external E1 signal is coupled by the transformerand then is sent to the board.

2 Codec unit l Equalizes the received signal.l Restores the clock signal.l Detects the T_ALOS alarm.l Performs HDB3 decoding.


l Asynchronously maps the signal into C-12.l Processes path overheads and forms the signal to be

VC-12.l Processes pointers and forms the signal to be TU-12.l Three TU-12s are performed with byte interleaving

and are multiplexed into one TUG-2.l Seven TUG-2s are performed with byte interleaving

and are multiplexed into one TUG-3.l Three TUG-3s are performed with byte interleaving

and are multiplexed into one C-4.l C-4 is added with higher order path overheads and the

VC-4 is formed.


l Processes the clock signal.l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication

signal to the PXC.


Table 3-76 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the PO1/PH1/PD1

Procedure

Functionalmodule

Processing Flow


l Processes the clock signal.l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal





Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Procedure

Functionalmodule

Processing Flow


l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects the

corresponding alarms and performance events.l Extracts E1 signals.

3 Codec unit l Performs HDB3 coding.

4 Line interface unit l The E1 signal is coupled by the transformer and thenis sent to the external cable.

Control Signal ProcessingThe board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC.


Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-35 PO1 front panelP

O1

PO

1S

TAT

SR

V

1~8

PO

1

PO

1S

TAT

SR

V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SL61PO1

SL62PO1

Figure 3-36 PH1 front panel

PH

1

PH

1ST

ATSR

V

1~8 9~16



3-89

Figure 3-37 PD1 front panel

PD1

PD1

STA

TSR

V

1-16 17-32

Indicators

Table 3-77 PO1/PH1/PD1 indicator description





access.





Interfaces

Table 3-78 SL61PO1 interface description


1-8 1 to 8 E1 interfaces DB44 E1 cable to theexternal equipmentor E1 cable to the E1Panel




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Table 3-79 SL62PO1 interface description


1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 1 to 8 E1 interfaces RJ-45 The cables need to bemade on site byterminating networkcables with RJ-45connectors

Table 3-80 PH1 interface description


1-8 1 to 8 E1 interfaces DB44 E1 cable to theexternal equipmentor E1 cable to the E1Panel

9-16 9 to 16 E1 interfaces DB44

Table 3-81 PD1 interface description


1-16 1 to 16 E1 interfaces MDR68 E1 transit cable

17-32 17 to 32 E1 interfaces MDR68

For the pin assignments of the DB44 interface of the SL61PO1/PH1 board, see Figure 3-38 andrefer toTable 3-82. For the pin assignment of the RJ-45 interface of the SL62PO1 board, seeFigure 3-39, and refer to Table 3-83. For the pin assignments of the MDR68 interface of thePD1 board, see Figure 3-40 and refer to Table 3-85.

Figure 3-38 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface (PO1/PH1)

Pos. 1

Pos. 44



3-91

Table 3-82 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface (PO1/PH1)

Pin Signal Pin Signal

15 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 38 1st E1 receiving differential signal (+)

30 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 23 1st E1 receiving differential signal (-)

14 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 37 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (+)

29 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 22 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (-)

13 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 36 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (+)

28 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 21 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (-)

12 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 35 4th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

27 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 20 4th E1 receiving differential signal (-)









Others Reserved - -

Figure 3-39 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1)

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-83 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1)

Interface Pin Signal

n (n: 1-8) 1 The nth E1 transmitting differential signal (+)

2 The nth E1 transmitting differential signal (-)




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


4 The nth E1 receiving differential signal (+)

5 The nth E1 receiving differential signal (-)

3, 6, 7, 8 Reserved

The RJ-45 interface has two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table3-84.

Table 3-84 Indicator description of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1)


Yellow indicator On The E1 signal is lost.

Off The E1 signal is normal.

Green indicator - Reserved.

Figure 3-40 Pin assignments of the MDR68 interface (PD1)

Pos. 1

Pos. 68

Table 3-85 Pin assignments of the MDR68 interface (PD1)


36 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 38 1st E1 receiving differential signal (+)

35 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 37 1st E1 receiving differential signal (-)

42 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 40 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (+)

41 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 39 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (-)

46 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 44 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (+)

45 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 43 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (-)





3-93


























Others Reserved - -

3.11.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the PO1/PH1 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Figure 3-41 Slots of the PO1/PH1/PD1 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

PO1/PH1/PD1 PO1/PH1/PD1

PO1/PH1/PD1 PO1/PH1/PD1

PO1/PH1/PD1

Table 3-86 Slot assigning principle of the PO1/PH1/PD1

Item Description

Slot assignment priority in the caseof the IDU 620

slot 4 > Slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

3.11.6 Board Feature CodeThe interface impedance of a PO1/PH1/PD1 can be identified by the board feature code of thebar code. The board feature code is the number after the board name of the bar code.

Table 3-87 Board feature code of the PO1/PH1/PD1

Board Feature Code Interface Impedance (ohm)

A 75

B 120


J2 Byte

The board supports two modes, which are as follows:

l Single-byte mode





3-95


E1 Interface PerformanceThe performance of the E1 interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The following tableprovides the primary performance.

Table 3-88 E1 interface performance

Item Performance


Code pattern HDB3


One coaxial wire pair One symmetrical wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 75 120


Table 3-89 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PO1/PH1

Item Description

PO1 PH1 PD1


Weight 280 g 310 g 380 g

Powerconsumption

< 2 W < 2.8 W < 5.8 W

3.12 EFT4The EFT4 is a 4-port 10M/100M Ethernet transparent transmission board.

3.12.1 Version DescriptionThe EFT4 has two functional versions: SL61EFT4VER.A and SL61EFT4VER.B.

3.12.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EFT4 transparently transmits 4xFE signals.

3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one FE signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the EFT4.

3.12.4 Front Panel




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

There are indicators and FE ports on the front panel.

3.12.5 Valid SlotsThe IDU 620 can be configured with up to four EFT4s, and the EFT4 can be installed in slots4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

3.12.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: SDHparameters, Ethernet external port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters.

3.12.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including FE port performance, boardmechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.12.1 Version DescriptionThe EFT4 has two functional versions: SL61EFT4VER.A and SL61EFT4VER.B.

Table 3-90 Differences between SL61EFT4VER.A and SL61EFT4VER.B

Function SL61EFT4VER.A SL61EFT4VER.B

LPT Not supported Supported

3.12.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EFT4 transparently transmits 4xFE signals.

Ethernet Service Signal Processingl Supports the setting and querying of the working modes of the Ethernet ports. The working

modes supported are 100M full-duplex, 10M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.l Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with a maximum frame length that

ranges from 1518 to 1535 bytes.l Supports JUMBO frames with a maximum frame length of 9600 bytes.l Supports the IEEE 802.3x flow control based on Ethernet port.l Supports the point-to-point link state pass through (LPT) function (only the

SL61EFT4VER.B provides this function).

NOTE

For the details of the features of Ethernet ports and LPT, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio TransmissionSystem Feature Description.

Encapsulation and Mapping of Ethernet Service Signalsl Supports the following encapsulation formats: high level data link control (HDLC), link

access procedure-SDH (LAPS), and generic framing procedure (GFP).l Supports an uplink bandwidth of 2xVC-4s.l Supports the virtual concatenation mapping at VC-12-Xv (X = 1-63) or VC-3-Xv (X =

1-6).l Supports the link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS).



3-97

NOTE

For the details of encapsulation and mapping of Ethernet services, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 RadioTransmission System Feature Description.

Overhead Processingl Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-3/VC-12 level.l Supports the querying of the J1, J2, C2, and V5 bytes.l Supports the setting of the J1, J2, C2, and V5 bytes.


setting the BER threshold.l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performance

threshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.l Supports events and alarms.

NOTE

l For the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

l For the details of RMON performance, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop in the PHY layer of Ethernet ports.l Supports inloop in the MAC layer of Ethernet ports.l Supports inloop and outloop on the VC-3 path.l Supports the transmitting and receiving of GFP test frames.l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

NOTE


l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the services arenot affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board isinitialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services canbe interrupted.

3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one FE signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the EFT4.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


Figure 3-42 Block diagram of the EFT4 working principle

Backplane

PXCInterfacemodule

Encap-sulationmodule

SCC

Serviceprocessing

module

Mappingmodule

FE

FE

Service bus Control bus FE

PXC

Logicprocessing

unit

Control andcommunication

module


Table 3-91 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EFT4

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Interface processingmodule

Performs reassembly, decoding, and serial/parallelconversion for the accessed FE signal.

2 Service processingmodule

Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRCcode processing, and Ethernet performance counting forthe frame signal.

3 Encapsulationmodule

Performs the HDLC, LAPS, or GFP encapsulation for theEthernet frames.

4 Mapping module Performs mapping at the VC-12/VC-3 level for the dataframes after encapsulation.


Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalto the PXC.



3-99


Table 3-92 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EFT4

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow


Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

2 Mapping module Demaps the signal at the VC-12/VC-3 level.


Decapsulates the signal after the demapping.


Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC codecomputing, and Ethernet performance counting.


Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding and sendsthe generated FE signal to the Ethernet port.



3.12.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and FE ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-43 EFT4 front panel

EFT

4

EFT

4

FE2 FE3

STAT

SRV

FE1 FE4




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Indicators

Table 3-93 EFT4 indicator description





access.





Interfaces

Table 3-94 EFT4 interface description


FE1-FE4 Fast Ethernet serviceinterface

RJ-45 Network cable

For the front view and pin assignments of FE1-FE4 interfaces, see Figure 3-44 and refer toTable 3-95.


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1



3-101

Table 3-95 Pin assignments of FE1-FE4 interfaces


FE1-FE4 1 Transmitting data (+)

2 Transmitting data (-)

3 Receiving data (+)

6 Receiving data (-)

4, 5, 7, 8 Reserved

FE1-FE4 interfaces each have two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table3-96.

Table 3-96 Ethernet port indicator description


LINK (green) On The link is normal.

Off The link fails.

ACT (yellow) On or flashing The port is transmitting orreceiving data.


3.12.5 Valid SlotsThe IDU 620 can be configured with up to four EFT4s, and the EFT4 can be installed in slots4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Figure 3-45 Slots of the EFT4 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

EFT4 EFT4

EFT4 EFT4

EFT4




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Table 3-97 Slot assigning principle of the EFT4

Item Description




SDH ParametersThe J1 and J2 bytes are the SDH parameters that you may frequently set.

l J1 byteThe board supports four modes, which are as follows:– Single-byte mode– 16-byte mode with CRC– 16-byte mode without CRC– 64-byte modeBy default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be receivedis set to the disable mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The firstbyte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWeiSBS ".

l J2 byteThe board supports two modes, which are as follows:– Single-byte mode– 16-byte mode with CRCBy default, the board does not monitor the received J2 byte, that is, the J2 byte to be receivedis set to the disable mode. The J2 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The firstbyte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWeiSBS ". The latter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

Ethernet External Port ParametersThe EFT4 provides four external ports, that is, PORT1 to PORT4. The parameters that you mayfrequently set for every external port are as follows: port enabled, working mode, maximumframe length, and flow control.


l Working modeThe board supports three working modes as follows:– Auto-negotiation



3-103

– 10M full-duplex

– 100M full-duplex

By default, the working mode is auto-negotiation. When the equipment on the oppositeside adopts the auto-negotiation, 10M full-duplex, or 100M full-duplex mode, the localequipment should be set to the same working mode. When the equipment on the oppositeside adopts 10M half-duplex or 100M half-duplex, the local equipment should be set to theauto-negotiation mode.

l Maximum frame length

The board supports a maximum frame length that ranges from 1518 to 1535 bytes. Bydefault, the maximum frame length is 1522 bytes. This parameter should not be set smallerthan the maximum length of the Ethernet frame transmitted from the equipment on theopposite side. Usually, the default value can meet the requirement.

l Flow control

The board supports three flow control modes as follows:

– Disabled mode

– Autonegotiation flow control mode

– Non-autonegotiation flow control mode

By default, the flow control mode is set to the disabled mode.

The autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:

– Enable dissymmetric flow control

The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the receivedPAUSE frames.



– Enable symmetric/dissymmetric flow control

The port has the following abilities:

– Transmitting PAUSE frames during congestion and processing the received PAUSEframes

– Transmitting PAUSE frames during congestion and not processing the receivedPAUSE frames

– Processing the received PAUSE frames and not transmitting PAUSE frames duringcongestion

The non-autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:

– Send only


– Receive only

The port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE framesduring congestion.






Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

The flow control parameter should be set depending on that of the equipment on the oppositeside.

Ethernet Internal Port ParametersThe EFT4 provides four internal ports, that is, VCTURNK1 to VCTRUNK4, corresponding toPORT1 to PORT4 respectively. The parameters that you may frequently set for every internalport are as follows: encapsulation/mapping protocol, bound path, and LCAS.

l Encapsulation/Mapping protocolThe board supports three encapsulation/mapping protocols: GFP, HDLC, and LAPS. GFPis the default protocol. The protocol and related parameter settings should be the same asthe protocol and related parameter settings of the equipment on the opposite side.

l Bound pathAll the VC-3s in VC-4-1 and VC-4-2 can be bound to the VCTRUNK. The maximumnumber of bound paths is 6. All the VC-12s in VC-4-2 can also be bound to the VCTRUNK.The maximum number of bound paths is 63.

l LCASThe board supports the enabling/disabling of the LCAS function. By default, the LCASfunction is disabled. The enabling status and parameter settings of the LCAS functionshould be the same as the enabling status and parameter settings of the equipment on theopposite side.

3.12.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including FE port performance, boardmechanical behavior, and power consumption.

FE electrical Interface PerformanceFE interfaces are 10/100BASE-T(X) interfaces and comply with IEEE 802.3. The followingtable provides the primary performance.

Table 3-98 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)100 (100BASE-TX)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)




3-105


Table 3-99 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EFT4

Item Description


Weight 306 g

Power consumption 7.5 W

3.13 EMS6The EMS6 is a 4-Port RJ-45 + 2-Port SFP Fast Ethernet / Gigabit Ethernet Switching ProcessingBoard.

3.13.1 Version DescriptionThe EMS6 has two functional versions: SL61EMS6VER.A and SL61EMS6VER.B.

3.13.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EMS6 accesses 4xFE signals and 2xGE/FE signals, and supports transparent transmissionservices and Layer 2 switching services.

3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one FE/GE signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the EMS6.

3.13.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, four FE ports, two SFP GE ports, and a label on the front panel.

3.13.5 Valid SlotsThe EMS6 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620.

3.13.6 Board Feature CodeThe type of the SFP module equipped on the EMS6 can be identified by the board feature codethat is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code.


3.13.8 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including GE port performance, FE portperformance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.13.1 Version DescriptionThe EMS6 has two functional versions: SL61EMS6VER.A and SL61EMS6VER.B.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Table 3-100 Differences between SL61EMS6VER.A and SL61EMS6VER.B

Function SL61EMS6VER.A SL61EMS6VER.B

LPT Not supported Supported

3.13.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EMS6 accesses 4xFE signals and 2xGE/FE signals, and supports transparent transmissionservices and Layer 2 switching services.

Ethernet Service Signal Processingl Provides GE optical interfaces or GE electrical interfaces by using two SFP modules. The

GE electrical interface is compatible with the FE electrical interface.l Supports the setting and querying of the working modes of the Ethernet ports. The working

modes supported are as follows:– The FE interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M

half-duplex, and auto-negotiation working modes.– The GE electrical interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-

duplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation working modes.– The GE optical interface supports 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation working

modes.l Supports the setting and querying of the network attributes of the Ethernet ports. The

following three network attributes are available: UNI, C-aware, and S-aware.l Sets and queries TAG attributes of Ethernet interfaces, and supports three TAG attributes

of Ethernet interfaces, namely, Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid. The TAG attribute of anEthernet interface functions only when the network attribute of the Ethernet interface is setto UNI.

l Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with a maximum frame length thatranges from 1518 to 9600 bytes.

l Supports JUMBO frames with a maximum frame length of 9600 bytes.External ports PORT1-PORT6 and internal ports VCTRUNK5-VCTRUNK8 supportJUMBO frames. Internal ports VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK4 do not support JUMBO frames.

l Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x (only fortransparently transmitted Ethernet services).

l Supports the point-to-point LPT function and the point-to-multipoint LPT function (onlythe SL61EMS6VER.B provides this function).

l Supports the link aggregation group (LAG) function.l Supports Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS).

NOTE

For the details of the features of Ethernet ports, LPT, LAG, and ERPS, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 RadioTransmission System Feature Description.

Layer 2 Switching Processing of Ethernet Servicesl Supports the EPL services that are based on PORT.



3-107

l Supports the EVPL services that are based on PORT+VLAN.l Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d bridge.l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q bridge.l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.l Supports the broadcast packet suppression function, spanning tree protocol (STP), and rapid

spanning tree protocol (RSTP). The function and protocols comply with IEEE 802.1w.l Supports the IGMP snooping.

NOTE

For the details of Layer 2 switching processing of Ethernet services, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 RadioTransmission System Feature Description.

QinQ Service Processingl Supports the VLAN stack nesting technology that complies with IEEE 802.1ad.l Adds, strips, and converts the S-VLAN tag.l Supports the EVPL services that are based on QinQ.l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on QinQ (IEEE 802.1ad bridge).

NOTE

For the details of the QinQ service, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

Ethernet Service QoS Processingl Supports the following traffic classifications:

– Port-based traffic classification– Port+CVLAN-based traffic classification– Port+SVLAN-based traffic classification– Port+CVLAN+SVLAN-based traffic classification

l Supports traffic-based CAR.l Supports four CoS types, namely, Simple, VLAN PRI, DSCP, and IP TOS, and allocates

packets to different egress queues.l Supports PORT-based or PORT queue-based traffic shaping.l An Ethernet interface supports eight egress queues, and supports the SP, WRR, or SP+WRR

queue scheduling mode.

NOTE

For the details of the Ethernet QoS, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

Ethernet OAM Processingl Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.1ag:

– Management of OAM maintenance points– Continuity check test– Loopback test– Link trace test




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

– Ping test

– Performance test

l Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.3ah:

– OAM automatic discovery

– Link performance monitoring

– Fault detection

– Remote loopback initiating

– Selfloop detection and selfloop port blocking

NOTE

For the details of the Ethernet OAM, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

Traffic Statisticsl Supports traffic monitoring over Ethernet interfaces. The received traffic threshold can be

set for Ethernet interfaces and an alarm is reported when the received traffic exceeds thethreshold.

l Supports traffic statistics over Ethernet interfaces. The period of traffic statistics is 15minutes and the statistic data can be stored for 30 days.

Encapsulation and Mapping of Ethernet Service Signalsl Supports the following encapsulation formats: HDLC, LAPS, and GFP.

l Supports an uplink bandwidth of 2xVC-4s.

l Supports the virtual concatenation mapping at VC-12-Xv (X = 1-63) or VC-3-Xv (X =1-6).

l Supports the LCAS.

NOTE

For the details of encapsulation and mapping of Ethernet services, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 RadioTransmission System Feature Description.

Overhead Processingl Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-3/VC-12 level.

l Supports the querying of the J1, J2, C2, and V5 bytes.

l Supports the setting of the J1, J2, C2, and V5 bytes.


l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the BER threshold.


l Supports RMON performance events and alarms.



3-109

NOTE



Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop in the PHY layer of Ethernet ports.

l Supports inloop in the MAC layer of Ethernet ports.

l Supports inloop and outloop on the VC-3 path.

l Supports the transmitting and receiving of GFP test frames and Ethernet test frames.




l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the SFP module.

NOTE


l Generally, when a warm reset is performed, the board software is reset but the services are not affected.When LAG protection is configured, however, a warm reset may result in packet loss. When a cold reset isperformed, not only the board software is reset, but also the board is initialized. When a cold reset isperformed, services can be interrupted.

3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one FE/GE signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the EMS6.


Figure 3-46 Block diagram of the EMS6 working principle

Backplane

PXCInterfacemodule


SCC

Serviceprocessing

module

Mappingmodule

FE/GE

FE/GE

Service bus Control bus FE/GE

PXC

Logicprocessing

unit


moduleMail box




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


Table 3-101 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EMS6

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow


Performs reassembly, decoding, and serial/parallelconversion for the accessed FE/GE signal.


Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRCcode processing, and Ethernet performance counting forthe frame signal.Classifies the traffic according to the service format andconfiguration requirements (for example, Ethernetpacket, VLAN packet, and other packet format).Processes tags according to the service type.Forwards data frames according to the service type.


Performs the HDLC, LAPS, or GFP encapsulation for theEthernet frames.

4 Mapping module Performs mapping at the VC-12, VC-3, or at acorresponding virtual concatenation level for the dataframes after encapsulation.




Table 3-102 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EMS6

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow



2 Mapping module Demaps the signal at the VC-12, VC-3, or at acorresponding virtual concatenation level.




Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC codecomputing, and Ethernet performance counting.Forwards data frames according to the service type.Processes tags according to the service type.



3-111

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow


Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for theEthernet frame signal, and sends the generated FE/GEsignal to the Ethernet port.

Control Signal Processing Flow

The communication and control module of the EMS6 consists of the CPU and its peripheralcircuits. The EMS6 communicates with the SCC through the mailbox. The configuration dataand querying commands from the SCC are issued to the various units of the EMS6 through thecommunication and control module. The command response reported by the units inside theEMS6, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the SCC through thecommunication and control module.

3.13.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, four FE ports, two SFP GE ports, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-47 EMS6 front panel

EM

S6

EM

S6

FE2FE1 FE3 FE4 GE1 GE2

STAT

PRO

GSR

VLI

NK1

ACTI

V1LI

NK2

ACTI

V2

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

Indicators

Table 3-103 EMS6 indicator description





PROG 100 ms on (green), and 100ms off

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is loading thesoftware.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


300 ms on (green), and 300ms off

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is in the BIOS bootstate.

On (green) The upper layer software isbeing initialized.

100 ms on (red), and 100 msoff

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the BOOTROM self-checkfails.

On (red) When the board is beingpowered or being reset, thememory self-check fails orloading upper layer softwarefails.When the board is running,the logic files or upper layersoftware is lost.

Off The software is runningnormally.





Green indicator (LINK1) On The link at the GE1 port isnormal.

Off The link at the GE1 port fails.

Yellow indicator (ACTIV1) On or flashing The GE1 port is transmittingor receiving data.

Off The GE1 port is nottransmitting or receivingdata.






3-113



Interfaces

Table 3-104 EMS6 interface description

Interface

Description Type of Connector Cable

FE1-FE4 Fast Ethernetservice interface

RJ-45 Network cable.

GE1-GE2

Gigabit Ethernetservice interface

Replaceable SFP modulel Optical module: Uses the

LC connector, andsupports 1000BASE-SXand 1000BASE-LX.

l Electrical module: Usesthe RJ-45 connector andsupports10/100/1000BASE-T(X).

l When the optical moduleis used, use the fiberjumper.

l When the electricalmodule is used, use thenetwork cable.

The FE port and GE electrical port of the EMS6 support the MDI, MDI-X, and autosensingmode. For the front view and pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector, see Figure 3-48 and referto Table 3-105 and Table 3-106.


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
























3-115








Off The link fails.



LabelThere is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EMS6.

The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS1. This means that the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface of the EMS6 islower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

3.13.5 Valid SlotsThe EMS6 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620.

Figure 3-49 Slots of the EMS6 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

EMS6 EMS6

EMS6 EMS6

EMS6




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Table 3-108 Slot assigning principle of the EMS6

Item Description


Slot 4 > Slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

3.13.6 Board Feature CodeThe type of the SFP module equipped on the EMS6 can be identified by the board feature codethat is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code.

Table 3-109 Board feature code of the EMS6

Board Feature Code Module Type BOM Code of the Module

01 1000BASE-SX (0.55 km) 34060286

02 1000BASE-LX (10 km) 34060219

03 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) 34100052


SDH ParametersThe J1 and J2 bytes are the SDH parameters that you may frequently set.

l J1 byteThe board supports the following four modes: single-byte mode, 16-byte mode with CRC,16-byte mode without CRC, and 64-byte mode. By default, the board does not monitor thereceived J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received is set to the disable mode. The J1 byteto be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and thefollowing 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS " (five blank spaces after thecharacter string).

l J2 byteThe board supports the following two modes: single-byte mode and 16-byte mode withCRC. By default, the board does not monitor the received J2 byte, that is, the J2 byte to bereceived is set to the disable mode. The J2 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC.The first byte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code"HuaWei SBS " (five blank spaces after the character string).

Ethernet External Port ParametersThe EMS6 provides six external ports, that is, PORT1 to PORT6. The parameters that you mayfrequently set for every external port are as follows:



3-117

l Basic attributesl TAG attributesl Network attributesl Flow controll Advanced attributes



l Working mode

– The FE interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100Mhalf-duplex, and auto-negotiation working modes.

– The GE electrical interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation working modes.

– The GE optical interface supports 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation workingmodes.

Set the working mode of the equipment on the local side depending on the working modeof the equipment on the opposite side. For the setting suggestions, refer to the OptiX RTN620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

l Maximum frame lengthThe board supports a maximum frame length that ranges from 1518 to 9600 bytes. Bydefault, the maximum frame length is 1522 bytes. This parameter should not be set smallerthan the maximum length of the Ethernet frame transmitted from the equipment on theopposite side. Usually, the default value can meet the requirement.

The TAG attributes are used to specify whether and how the VLAN services are processed. TheTAG attributes include the following parameters:

l TAGThe TAG parameter is used to identify the type of packets. The TAG parameter can be setto TAG aware, access, and hybrid. By default, the TAG parameter is set to TAG aware.The principles for processing packets are as follows:

– Tag aware: The port allows only the packets that contain a TAG to pass, and discardsthe packets that do not contain a TAG.

– Access: The port allows only the packets that do not contain a TAG to pass, and discardsthe packets that contain a TAG.

– Hybrid: The port processes both the packets that contain a TAG and the packets that donot contain a TAG. In the case of the packets that do not contain a TAG, the port addsa TAG to the packets according to the VLAN ID of the port. In the case of the packetsthat contain a TAG, the port receives the packets without change.

l Ingress checkThis parameter is used to specify whether the TAG of a packet is checked. This parametercan be set to enabled or disabled. By default, this parameter is set to enabled. If thisparameter is set to disabled, the TAG flag is invalid. In this case, the port transparentlytransmits the received packet.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

l Default VLAN IDWhen the TAG parameter is set to access or hybrid, you can set a default VLAN ID for theport. The default VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4095. By default, the default VLAN ID is 1.

The network attributes are used to specify whether and how the QinQ services are processed.The network attribute of each port can be set to UNI, C-aware, or S-aware. By default, thenetwork attribute of a port is UNI. The principles for processing packets are as follows:

l UNI: The port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The UNIport has the tag aware, access, and hybrid attributes.

l C-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets.The port considers that the accessed packet does not contain an S-VLAN tag.

l S-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets.The port considers that the accessed packet contain a S-VLAN tag.

The board supports the following flow control modes:autonegotiation flow control mode andnon-autonegotiation flow control mode. By default, the flow control mode is set to the disabledmode. The flow control parameter should be set depending on the flow control parameter of theequipment on the opposite side.

l The autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:– Disabled

The port does not work in the autonegotiation flow control mode.– Enable dissymmetric flow control


– Enable symmetric flow controlThe port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the receivedPAUSE frames.

– Enable symmetric/dissymmetric flow controlThe port adopts the symmetric flow control mode or dissymmetric flow control modeaccording to the auto-negotiation result.

l The non-autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:– Disabled

The port does not work in the non-autonegotiation flow control mode.– Send only


– Receive onlyThe port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE framesduring congestion.


The advanced attributes are used to set the broadcast packet suppression function. The broadcastpacket suppression function prevents broadcast packets from affecting normal data services andalso effectively prevents network attacks. The following parameters need to be set for the



3-119

broadcast packet suppression function: Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression and BroadcastPacket Suppression Threshold.l The Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled.

– When the Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter is set to Disabled, the portdoes not use the broadcast packet suppression function.

– When the Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter is set to Enabled, the portdiscards the received broadcast packets when the traffic of the received broadcastpackets exceeds the set broadcast packet suppression threshold.

l The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter can be set to a value in the rangefrom 1 to 10. When this parameter is set to N, the port discards the received broadcastpackets when the ratio of the received broadcast packets to the total packets exceedsNx10%.

Ethernet Internal Port ParametersThe EMS6 provides eight internal ports, that is, VCTURNK1 to VCTRUNK8. The parametersthat you may frequently set for every internal port are as follows: encapsulation/mappingprotocol, bound path, and LCAS.

l The TAG attributes are used to specify whether and how the VLAN services are processed.The TAG attributes include the following parameters:– TAG

The TAG parameter is used to identify the type of packets. The TAG parameter can beset to TAG aware, access, and hybrid. By default, the TAG parameter is set to TAGaware. The principles for processing packets are as follows:– Tag aware: The port allows only the packets that contain a TAG to pass, and discards

the packets that do not contain a TAG.– Access: The port allows only the packets that do not contain a TAG to pass, and

discards the packets that contain a TAG.– Hybrid: The port processes both the packets that contain a TAG and the packets that

do not contain a TAG. In the case of packets that do not contain a TAG, the portadds a TAG to the packets according to the VLAN ID of the port. In the case ofpackets that contain a TAG, the port simply receives the packets without any change.

– Ingress checkThis parameter is used to specify whether the TAG of a packet is checked. Thisparameter can be set to enabled or disabled. By default, this parameter is set to enabled.If this parameter is set to disabled, the TAG flag is invalid. In this case, the porttransparently transmits the received packet.

– Default VLAN IDWhen the TAG parameter is set to access or hybrid, you can set a default VLAN ID forthe port. The default VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4095. By default, the default VLANID is 1.

l Encapsulation/Mapping protocolThe board supports three encapsulation/mapping protocols: GFP, HDLC, and LAPS. GFPis the default protocol. The protocol and related parameter settings should be the same asthe protocol and related parameter settings of the equipment on the opposite side.

l The network attributes are used to specify whether and how the QinQ services areprocessed. The network attribute of each port can be set to UNI, C-aware, or S-aware. By




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

default, the network attribute of a port is UNI. The principles for processing packets are asfollows:

– UNI: The port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The UNIport has the tag aware, access, and hybrid attributes.

– C-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets.The port considers that the accessed packet does not contain an S-VLAN tag.

– S-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets.The port considers that the accessed packet contain a S-VLAN tag.

l Bound path

All the VC-3s in VC-4-1 and VC-4-2 can be bound to the VCTRUNK. The maximumnumber of bound paths is 6. All the VC-12s in VC-4-2 can also be bound to the VCTRUNK.The maximum number of bound paths is 63.

l LCAS

The board supports the enabling/disabling of the LCAS function. By default, the LCASfunction is disabled. The enabling status and parameter settings of the LCAS functionshould be the same as the enabling status and parameter settings of the equipment on theopposite side.

3.13.8 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including GE port performance, FE portperformance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

GE Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the GE optical interface is compliant with IEEE 802.3. The following tableprovides the primary performance.

Table 3-110 GE optical interface performance

Item Performance


Classification code 1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX

Fiber type Multi-mode fiber Single-mode fiber

Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10

Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355

Mean launched power (dBm) -9.5 to 0 -9 to -3

Minimum receiver sensitivity (dBm) -17 -19

Minimum overload (dBm) 0 -3

Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 9 9



3-121

NOTE

Ethernet service processing boards use SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can usedifferent types of SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes andtransmission distances.

GE Electrical Interface PerformanceThe GE electrical interface is 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface and compliant with IEEE 802.3.The GE electrical interface is compatible with FE electrical interfaces. The following tableprovides the primary performance.

Table 3-111 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)100 (100BASE-TX)1000 (1000BASE-T)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)


NOTE

Ethernet service processing boards use SFP modules to provide 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interfaces.



Item Performance







Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


Table 3-113 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EMS6

Item Description


Weight 400 g


3.14 EFP6The EFP6 is a 6-port Fast Ethernet EoPDH processing board.

3.14.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the EFP6 is SL61.

3.14.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EFP6 access 6xFE signals, transmits the FE services in EoPDH mode, and supportstransparently transmitted services and Layer 2 switching services.

3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one FE signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the EFP6.

3.14.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and six FE interfaces on the front panel.

3.14.5 Valid SlotsThe EFP6 can be installed in slots 4-8 of the IDU 620.

3.14.6 NM Configuration ReferenceOn the NMS, the board parameters that you may frequently set are SDH parameters, Ethernetexternal port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters.

3.14.7 Technical SpecificationsThis section describes board specifications, including FE port performance, board mechanicalbehavior, and power consumption.

3.14.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the EFP6 is SL61.

3.14.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EFP6 access 6xFE signals, transmits the FE services in EoPDH mode, and supportstransparently transmitted services and Layer 2 switching services.



3-123

Ethernet Service Signal Processingl Sets and queries working modes of Ethernet interfaces, and supports five working modes

of Ethernet interfaces, namely, 10M full duplex, 10M half duplex, 100M full duplex, 100Mhalf duplex, and auto-negotiation.

l Sets and queries network attributes of Ethernet interfaces, and supports three networkattributes of Ethernet interfaces, UNI, C-Aware, and S-Aware.

l Sets and queries TAG attributes of Ethernet interfaces, and supports three TAG attributesof Ethernet interfaces, namely, Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid. The TAG attribute of anEthernet interface functions only when the network attribute of the Ethernet interface is setto UNI.

l Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with the maximum frame lengthranging from 1518 to 2000 bytes.

l Supports JUMBO frames with the maximum frame length of 2000 bytes.

l Supports IEEE 802.3x flow control based on Ethernet interfaces (only for transparentlytransmitted Ethernet services).

l Supports the point-to-point and point-to-multipoint link state pass through (LPT) functions.

l Supports the link aggregation group (LAG) function.

NOTE

For details on features of Ethernet interfaces, LPT, and LAG, see theOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemFeature Description.

Layer 2 Switching Processing of Ethernet Servicesl Supports the EPL services that are based on PORT.

l Supports the EVPL services that are based on PORT+VLAN.

l Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d bridge.

l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q bridge.

l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.

l Supports the broadcast packet suppression function, spanning tree protocol (STP), and rapidspanning tree protocol (RSTP). The function and protocols comply with IEEE 802.1w.

l Supports the IGMP snooping.

NOTE

For the details of Layer 2 switching processing of Ethernet services, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 RadioTransmission System Feature Description.

QinQ Service Processingl Supports the VLAN stack nesting technology that complies with IEEE 802.1ad.

l Adds, strips, and converts the S-VLAN tag.

l Supports the EVPL services that are based on QinQ.

l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on QinQ (IEEE 802.1ad bridge).

NOTE

For the details of the QinQ service, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Ethernet Service QoS Processingl Supports the following traffic classifications:

– PORT-based traffic classification– PORT+VLAN-based traffic classification– PORT+VLAN+VLAN PRI-based traffic classification– PORT+SVLAN-based traffic classification– PORT+CVLAN+SVLAN-based traffic classification

l Supports four CoS types, namely, Simple, VLAN PRI, DSCP, and IP TOS, and allocatespackets to different egress queues.

l Supports traffic-based CAR.l Supports PORT queue-based traffic shaping.l An Ethernet interface supports eight egress queues, and supports the SP+WRR queue

scheduling mode.

NOTE

For details on the Ethernet QoS, see the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Ethernet OAM Processingl Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.1ag:

– Management of OAM maintenance points– Continuity check test– Loopback test– Link trace test– Ping test– Performance test

l Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.3ah:– OAM automatic discovery– Link performance monitoring– Fault detection– Remote loopback initiating– Selfloop detection and selfloop port blocking

NOTE

For the details of the Ethernet OAM, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

Encapsulation and Mapping of Ethernet Service Signalsl Supports the GFP encapsulation format.l Supports an uplink bandwidth of 63xE1.l Supports virtual concatenation mapping at E1-Xv (X = 1-16). When implemented on the

NMS, virtual concatenation mapping at E1-Xv is considered as virtual concatenationmapping at VC-12-Xv.

l Supports LCAS.



3-125

NOTE

For details on encapsulation and mapping of Ethernet services, see the OptiX RTN 620 Radio TransmissionSystem Feature Description.

Overhead Processingl Queries the J2 and V5 bytes.

l Sets the J2 and V5 bytes.


l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the BER threshold.


l Supports events and alarms.

NOTE



Maintenance Featuresl Supports port mirroring.

l Supports inloop in the PHY layer of Ethernet ports.

l Supports inloop in the MAC layer of Ethernet ports.

l Supports VC-12 inloop toward the backplane direction.

l Supports the transmitting and receiving of GFP test frames and Ethernet test frames.




NOTE


l Generally, when a warm reset is performed, the board software is reset but the services are not affected.When LAG protection is configured, however, a warm reset may result in packet loss. When a cold reset isperformed, not only the board software is reset, but also the board is initialized. When a cold reset isperformed, services can be interrupted.

3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one FE signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the EFP6.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


Figure 3-50 Principle block diagram of the EFP6

Backplane

PXCInterfacemodule


SCC

Serviceprocessing

module

Mappingmodule

FE

FE

Service bus Control bus FE signal

PXC

Logicprocessing

unit


moduleMail box


Table 3-114 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EFP6

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow


Performs reassembly, decoding, and serial/parallelconversion for the accessed FE signal.


Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRCcode processing, and Ethernet performance counting forthe frame signal.Classifies the traffic according to the service format andconfiguration requirements (for example, Ethernetpacket, VLAN packet, and other packet format).Processes tags according to the service type.Forwards data frames according to the service type.


Performs GFP encapsulation for the Ethernet frames.

4 Mapping module Maps the encapsulated data frames based on E1 virtualconcatenation and then encapsulates the data frames tothe corresponding VC-12s.





3-127


Table 3-115 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EFP6

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow



2 Mapping module Extracts the E1 payload from the VC-12s and demaps theE1 payload based on E1 virtual concatenation.




Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC codecomputing, and Ethernet performance counting.Forwards data frames according to the service type.Processes tags according to the service type.


Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding and sendsthe generated FE signal to the Ethernet interface.

Control Signal Processing FlowThe communication and control module of the EFP6 consists of the CPU and its peripheralcircuits. The EFP6 communicates with the SCC through the mailbox. The configuration dataand querying commands from the SCC are issued to the various units of the EFP6 through thecommunication and control module. The command response reported by the units inside theEFP6, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the SCC through thecommunication and control module.

3.14.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and six FE interfaces on the front panel.

Diagram of the Front Panel

Figure 3-51 Front panel of the EFP6

EFP6

EFP6

FE2FE1 FE3 FE4 FE5 FE6

STAT

PRO

GSR

V




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Indicators

Table 3-116 Description of indicators on the EFP6









On (green) When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the upper layer software isbeing initialized.When the board is running,the software is runningnormally.









3-129



Interfaces

Table 3-117 Description of the interfaces on the EFP6

Interface

Description Type of Connector Corresponding Cable

FE1-FE6 Fast Ethernetservice interface

RJ-45 Network cable

The FE interfaces on the EFP6 support the MDI, MDI-X, and autosensing modes. For the frontview and pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector, see Figure 3-52 and refer to Table 3-118 andTable 3-119.


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1


Pin 10/100BASE-T(X)

Signal Function

1 TX+ Transmitting data (+)

2 TX- Transmitting data (-)

3 RX+ Receiving data (+)

4 Reserved -

5 Reserved -

6 RX- Receiving data (-)

7 Reserved -

8 Reserved -




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


Pin 10/100BASE-T(X)

Signal Function

1 RX+ Receiving data (+)

2 RX- Receiving data (-)

3 TX+ Transmitting data (+)

4 Reserved -

5 Reserved -

6 TX- Transmitting data (-)

7 Reserved -

8 Reserved -





Off The link fails.



3.14.5 Valid SlotsThe EFP6 can be installed in slots 4-8 of the IDU 620.

Figure 3-53 Slots of the EFP6 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

EFP6 EFP6

EFP6 EFP6

EFP6



3-131

Table 3-121 Slot Allocation for the SL1D

Item Description



3.14.6 NM Configuration ReferenceOn the NMS, the board parameters that you may frequently set are SDH parameters, Ethernetexternal port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters.

SDH ParametersByte J2 is the SDH parameter that you may frequently set.

The board supports the single-byte mode and 16-byte mode with CRC. By default, the boarddoes not monitor the received J2 byte, that is, the J2 byte to be received is set to the disabledmode. The J2 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically createdand the other 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". The last five characters of thestring are blank spaces.

Ethernet External Port ParametersThe EFP6 provides six external ports, that is, PORT1 to PORT6. The parameters that you mayfrequently set for every external port are as follows:

l Basic attributesl TAG attributesl Network attributesl Flow controll Advanced attributes



l Working modeIn the case of FE electrical ports, there are four working modes: 10M half-duplex, 10Mfull-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex and auto-negotiation .Set the working mode of the equipment on the local side depending on the working modeof the equipment on the opposite side. For the setting suggestions, refer to the OptiX RTN620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

l Maximum frame lengthThe board supports a maximum frame length that ranges from 1518 to 2000 bytes. Bydefault, the maximum frame length is 1522 bytes. This parameter should not be set smaller




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

than the maximum length of the Ethernet frame transmitted from the equipment on theopposite side. Usually, the default value can meet the requirement.

The TAG attributes are used to specify whether and how the VLAN services are processed. TheTAG attributes include the following parameters:

l TAGThe TAG parameter is used to identify the type of packets. The TAG parameter can be setto TAG aware, access, and hybrid. By default, the TAG parameter is set to TAG aware.The principles for processing packets are as follows:– Tag aware: The port allows only the packets that contain a TAG to pass, and discards

the packets that do not contain a TAG.– Access: The port allows only the packets that do not contain a TAG to pass, and discards

the packets that contain a TAG.– Hybrid: The port processes both the packets that contain a TAG and the packets that do

not contain a TAG. In the case of the packets that do not contain a TAG, the port addsa TAG to the packets according to the VLAN ID of the port. In the case of the packetsthat contain a TAG, the port receives the packets without change.

l Ingress checkThis parameter is used to specify whether the TAG of a packet is checked. This parametercan be set to enabled or disabled. By default, this parameter is set to enabled. If thisparameter is set to disabled, the TAG flag is invalid. In this case, the port transparentlytransmits the received packet.

l Default VLAN IDWhen the TAG parameter is set to access or hybrid, you can set a default VLAN ID for theport. The default VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 1095. By default, the default VLAN ID is 1.

The network attributes are used to specify whether and how the QinQ services are processed.The network attribute of each port can be set to UNI, C-aware, or S-aware. By default, thenetwork attribute of a port is UNI. The principles for processing packets are as follows:

l UNI: The port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The UNIport has the tag aware, access, and hybrid attributes.

l C-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets.The port considers that the accessed packet does not contain an S-VLAN tag.

l S-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets.The port considers that the accessed packet contain a S-VLAN tag.

The board supports the following flow control modes: autonegotiation flow control mode andnon-autonegotiation flow control mode. By default, the flow control mode is set to the disabledmode. The flow control parameter should be set depending on the flow control parameter of theequipment on the opposite side.

l The autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:– Disabled

The port does not work in the autonegotiation flow control mode.– Enable dissymmetric flow control





3-133


– Enable symmetric/dissymmetric flow controlThe port has the following abilities:

– Transmitting PAUSE frames during congestion and processing the received PAUSEframes

– Transmitting PAUSE frames during congestion and not processing the receivedPAUSE frames

– Processing the received PAUSE frames and not transmitting PAUSE frames duringcongestion

l The non-autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:

– DisabledThe port does not work in the non-autonegotiation flow control mode.

– Send onlyThe port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the receivedPAUSE frames.

– Receive onlyThe port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE framesduring congestion.


The advanced attributes are used to set the broadcast packet suppression function. The broadcastpacket suppression function prevents broadcast packets from affecting normal data services andalso effectively prevents network attacks. The following parameters need to be set for thebroadcast packet suppression function: Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression and BroadcastPacket Suppression Threshold.l The Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled.

– When the Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter is set to Disabled, the portdoes not use the broadcast packet suppression function.

– When the Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter is set to Enabled, the portdiscards the received broadcast packets when the traffic of the received broadcastpackets exceeds the set broadcast packet suppression threshold.

l The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter can be set to a value in the rangefrom 1 to 10. When this parameter is set to N, the port discards the received broadcastpackets when the ratio of the received broadcast packets to the total packets exceedsNx10%.

Ethernet Internal Port Parameters

The EFP6 provides 16 internal ports, namely, VCTURNK1 to VCTRUNK16. The parametersthat you may frequently set for each internal port are as follows: encapsulation/mapping protocol,network attribute, bound path, and LCAS.

l The TAG attributes are used to specify whether and how the VLAN services are processed.The TAG attributes include the following parameters:




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

– TAGThe TAG parameter is used to identify the type of packets. The TAG parameter can beset to TAG aware, access, and hybrid. By default, the TAG parameter is set to TAGaware. The principles for processing packets are as follows:– Tag aware: The port allows only the packets that contain a TAG to pass, and discards

the packets that do not contain a TAG.– Access: The port allows only the packets that do not contain a TAG to pass, and

discards the packets that contain a TAG.– Hybrid: The port processes both the packets that contain a TAG and the packets that

do not contain a TAG. The port adds a TAG to the packets that do not contain a TAGaccording to the VLAN ID of the port.

– Ingress checkThis parameter is used to specify whether the TAG of a packet is checked. Thisparameter can be set to enabled or disabled. By default, this parameter is set to enabled.If this parameter is set to disabled, the TAG flag is invalid. In this case, the porttransparently transmits the received packet.

– Default VLAN IDWhen the TAG parameter is set to access or hybrid, you can set a default VLAN ID forthe port. The default VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 1095. By default, the default VLANID is 1.

l The network attributes are used to specify whether and how the QinQ services areprocessed. The network attribute of each port can be set to UNI, C-aware, or S-aware. Bydefault, the network attribute of a port is UNI. The principles for processing packets are asfollows:– UNI: The port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The UNI

port has the tag aware, access, and hybrid attributes.– C-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets.

The port considers that the accessed packet does not contain an S-VLAN tag.– S-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets.

The port considers that the accessed packet contain a S-VLAN tag.l Bound path

On the EFP6, a VCTRUNK can bind VC-12 channels (Ethernet services are encapsulatedto the payload of VC-12 channels, namely, to E1 signals). A VCTRUNK can bind amaximum of 16 VC-12 channels.

l LCASThe board supports the enabling/disabling of the LCAS function. By default, the LCASfunction is disabled. The enabling status and parameter settings of the LCAS functionshould be the same as the enabling status and parameter settings of the equipment on theopposite side.

3.14.7 Technical SpecificationsThis section describes board specifications, including FE port performance, board mechanicalbehavior, and power consumption.




3-135


Item Performance





Table 3-123 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EFP6

Item Performance


Weight 400 g


3.15 PXCThe PXC is an integrated power cross-connect clock board.

3.15.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the PXC is SL61.

3.15.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PXC supports not only the cross-connection and timing functions, but also supplies powerto other boards.

3.15.3 Working PrincipleThis section describes the working principle of the PXC.

3.15.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, external clock/wayside service ports, one power switch, and one label onthe front panel.

3.15.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the PXC can be installed in slots 1 and 3.

3.15.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are all the clock parameters.

3.15.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including clock timing and synchronizationperformance, wayside service interface performance, mechanical behavior, and powerconsumption.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

3.15.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the PXC is SL61.

3.15.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PXC supports not only the cross-connection and timing functions, but also supplies powerto other boards.

Power Processingl Receives one input of -48 V/-60 V power.l Outputs one -48 V and one +3.3 V power for other boards.l Supplies power to the components of the board.l Detects and protects the input power.

Clock Processingl Traces the clock source and provides the system clock and frame headers of service signals

and overhead signals for other boards.l Supports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be the

system clock source. The service clock source can be line, tributary, or microwave clocksource.

l Supports clock protection based on clock priority, SSM protocol, or extended SSMprotocol.

l Supports the detection of the external clock source.l Supports the trace, holdover, and free-run modes.l One PXC supports one input and one output of the external clock.l The external clock interface can be used as the wayside service interface.l The external clock interface can transparently transmit DCC bytes, synchronous data

overhead bytes, asynchronous data overhead bytes, and orderwire overhead bytes.

Cross-Connection Processingl Grooms inter-board service signals.l Provides full timeslot cross-connection of VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 equivalent to 16x16 VC-4.l Provides cross-connection of 16x16 pointer indication signals.l Supports service signal broadcasting.l Supports the AU_AIS alarm being transparently transmitted by the service path that VC-4s

can pass through.

Protection Processingl Supports 1+1 standby for the input power and 1+1 standby for the internal power module.l Supports 1+1 hot standby of its clock unit and cross-connect unit.l Supports the SNCP switching.l Supports the linear MSP.l Supports the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring on STM-4 optical transmission links.



3-137

l Supports the HSB switching.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the querying of the board temperature.



NOTEWhen a warm reset is performed, the software modules of the SCC is reset, but the services are not affected.When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board is initialized(if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services can beinterrupted.

3.15.3 Working PrincipleThis section describes the working principle of the PXC.


Figure 3-54 Block diagram of the PXC

Backplane

Other boardsCross-connect

unit

SCC

SCC


Clock signal

Clockunit

Externalclockunit

Powerunit

Logiccontrol

unit

External clock signal

Service boards

Other boards-48V -48V

+3.3V

External Clock Unit

In the receive direction, the external clock unit accesses one 2 MHz or 2 Mbit/s signal. If thesignal accessed is a wayside service signal, it is multiplexed into a 2M timeslot of an 8M overheadsignal and then sent to the SCC. If the signal accessed is a clock signal, it is sent to the clockunit.

In the transmit direction, to output the external clock, the unit receives an external clock signalfrom the clock unit. To output the wayside service signal, the unit demultiplexes the waysideservice signal from the 8M overhead signal.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Clock UnitThe clock unit detects and selects the external clock source or the service clock source fromservice boards. Through the phase-locked loop, the unit outputs the system clock and frameheaders of service signals and overhead signals for other units on the PXC and also other boards.

Cross-Connect UnitThe cross-connect unit is a three-level cross-connect matrix. The first level and the third levelare space division cross-connect matrixes that support VC-4 cross-connection only, with a cross-connect capacity of 16x16 VC-4s. The first level is called forward cross-connection and the thirdlevel is called backward cross-connection. The second level is a time division matrix thatsupports VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 cross-connection, with the cross-connect capacity equivalent to16x16 VC-4s. It is called lower order cross-connection.

The lower order cross-connect matrix is the core of a cross-connect unit. The forward andbackward cross-connect matrixes are used to improve the speed at which the cross-connect unitimplements service protection switching.

Figure 3-55 Cross-connect unit architecture

1#VC-4

16#VC-4

...

Forwardcross-connectmatrix

...

Lower ordercross-connectmatrix

Backward cross-connectmatrix

... ...

1#VC-4

16#VC-4

16x16 VC-4Equivalent

to16x16 VC-4

16x16 VC-4

Power UnitThe power unit processes the input -48 V/-60 V power as follows:

1. Uses a protection circuit to protect the board from very high input current.2. Uses a protection circuit to protect the board from reverse polar connection of the input

power.3. Performs EMI filtering for the input current and detects whether the input current is very

high or very low.4. Distributes one power input to the -48 V power bus in the backplane, to supply -48 V power

to the SCC and IF boards.5. Uses a DC/AC power module to convert the other power input into +3.3 V power and then

sends it to the +3.3 V power bus in the backplane, to supply +3.3 V power to the otherboards.

The power unit also supplies power to the chips on the PXC.

Logic Control UnitThe board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The command



3-139

response reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.


3.15.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, external clock/wayside service ports, one power switch, and one label onthe front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-56 PXC front panel

PXC

PXC

STA

T

AC

T

PW

RS

YN

C

-48V－-60V SYS-PWR

CLKO CLKINEG(-) RTN(+) PULL

Indicators

Table 3-124 PXC indicator description





access.

PWR On (green) The power supply is workingnormally.

On (red) The +3.3 V power supply isfaulty, or the input -48 Vpower supply is abnormal.

Off There is no power access.

SYNC On (green) The clock is normal.

On (red) The clock source is lost.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)




Interfaces

Table 3-125 PXC interface description


CLKI External clock/wayside serviceinput port

SMB External clockcable/waysideservice cable

CLIO External clock/wayside serviceoutput port

RTN(+) Power input (+) Type-D Power cable

NEG(-) Power output (-)

SYS-PWRa Input power switch - -

NOTE

a: The SYS-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To move the switch, you need to first pull outthe switch lever partially. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switchis set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.

LabelsThere is a high temperature warning label and an operation guidance label on the front panel.



NOTE




3-141

3.15.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the PXC can be installed in slots 1 and 3.

Figure 3-57 Slots of the PXC in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

Table 3-126 Slot assigning principle of the PXC

Item Description


Slot 1 > slot 3

NOTEWhen the system is powered on and the two PXCs are already seated, the PXC in slot 1 is the active boardand the one in slot 3 is the standby. If one PXC is inserted when another is already in the working state,the existing board becomes the active board and the newly inserted board becomes the standby board.

3.15.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are all the clock parameters.

Clock Source and Clock Source PrioritySupports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be the systemclock source. The service clock source can be a line, tributary, or microwave clock source. Selectthe required clock source and then set the clock source priority.

By default, the PXC employs the internal clock source, that is, the clock working in the free-runmode.

Clock ProtectionFor the PXC, clocks are protected based on the clock source priority, SSM, or extended SSMprotocols. Determine the clock protection scheme as required.

By default, the PXC protects clocks according to the clock source priority.

Input External Clock Parameter SettingTo input an external clock, set the type (2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz) of the external clock. If the SSMor extended SSM protocols are enabled, also set the S1 byte of the external clock.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Output External Clock Parameter SettingTo output an external clock, set the type (2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz) of the external clock and also theclock source traced by the 2M phase-locked loop.

3.15.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including clock timing and synchronizationperformance, wayside service interface performance, mechanical behavior, and powerconsumption.

Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

Table 3-127 Clock timing and synchronization performance

Item Performance

External synchronization source 2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703§9), or 2048 kHz (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13)

Frequency accuracy Compliant with ITU-T G.813

Pull-in, hold-in, and pull-out ranges

Noise generation

Noise tolerance

Noise transfer

Transient response and holdoverperformance

Wayside Service Interface Performance

Table 3-128 Wayside service interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of themicrowave frame.




Impedance (ohm) 75



3-143


Table 3-129 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PXC

Item Description


Weight 540 g


3.16 SCCThe SCC is a system control and communication board.

3.16.1 Version DescriptionThe SCC has three functional versions: SL61SCCVER.B, SL61SCCVER.C andSL61SCCVER.E.

3.16.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SCC provides not only the system control and communication function, but also variousmanagement and auxiliary interfaces.

3.16.3 Working PrincipleThis section describes the working principle of the SCC .

3.16.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, management and auxiliary interfaces, one reset switch, one indicator testswitch, and labels on the front panel.

3.16.5 Jumpers and Storage CardThe SCC PCB board has one group of jumpers and one pluggable storage card.

3.16.6 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the SCC is installed in slot 2.

3.16.7 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters you may frequently set are as follows: the NE ID/IPaddress, orderwire interface parameters, synchronous data interface parameters, andasynchronous data interface parameters.

3.16.8 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including orderwire interface performance,synchronous data interface performance, asynchronous data interface performance, boardmechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.16.1 Version DescriptionThe SCC has three functional versions: SL61SCCVER.B, SL61SCCVER.C andSL61SCCVER.E.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Table 3-130 Difference between the functional versions

Item SL61SCCVER.B SL61SCCVER.C SL61SCCVER.E

Synchronous datainterface

Does not provide theinterface.

1 1

Orderwire spanningfunction

Does not support thefunction.

Supports thefunction.

Supports thefunction.

Power module Provides the module. Does not provide themodule.

Provides the module.

3.16.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SCC provides not only the system control and communication function, but also variousmanagement and auxiliary interfaces.

System Control and Communicationsl Provides the system control and communication function to manage the other boards and

ODUs by using the NE software.l Controls the other boards by using the board software that runs on the SCC.

The board software of all the other boards except the EMS6 is integrated on the SCC.l Collects performance events and alarms.l Communicates with the NM system and processes at most 12-channel DCC.l Cross-connects overheads.

Management and Auxiliary Interfacesl Provides one NM interface and one NE cascade interface.l Provides one management serial port.l Provides one 6-input and 2-output alarm interface.l Provides one asynchronous data interface.l Provides one 64 kbit/s G.703-compliant synchronous data interface (only the SL61SCC of

VER.C or VER.E provides this function).l Provides one orderwire interface.l Supports the setting of the synchronous data interface as a transparent transmission

interface for orderwire bytes to realize the orderwire spanning function (only the SL61SCCof VER.C or VER.E provides this function).

Protection Processingl Processes the protection switching of 1+1 protection configuration.l Processes clock protection switching.l Processes linear MSP switching.l Processes the protection switching of a two-fiber bidirectional shared MSP ring.l Processes SNCP switching.



3-145

l Provides +3.3 V power standby protection (Only the SL61SCC of VER.B or VER.Eprovides this function).

Maintenance Featuresl Supports warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.l Supports the querying of the board temperature.l Supports the detecting of all the indicators of the boards.l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

3.16.3 Working PrincipleThis section describes the working principle of the SCC .


Figure 3-58 Block diagram of the SCC

Backplane


Overheadcross-

connectunit

Auxiliaryinterface

unit


unit

ODU control signal

-48V

+3.3V

Other boards

PXCPowerunit Other boards

Other boards

Orderwire interface

Asynchronous data interface

External alarm input/output interface

NM interface

NE cascade interface

Debugging serial portIF1A/IF1B

Synchronous data interface

NOTE

l The SL61SCC of VER.B does not have the synchronous data interface.

l The SL61SCC of VER.C does not have the power unit.

Auxiliary Interface Unit

The auxiliary interface unit of the SL61SCC of VER.C or VER.E processes the input and outputof the orderwire interface, asynchronous data interface, synchronous data interface, and externalalarm interface. The input/output information of the external alarm interface is processed by thecontrol and communication unit. The data of the orderwire interface, asynchronous datainterface, and synchronous data interface is interworked with the overhead cross-connect unitthrough the overhead bus.

The auxiliary interface unit of the SL61SCC of VER.B processes the input and output of theorderwire interface, asynchronous data interface, and external alarm interface. The input/outputinformation of the external alarm interface is processed by the control and communication unit.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

The data of the orderwire interface and asynchronous data interface is interworked with theoverhead cross-connect unit through the overhead bus.

Overhead Cross-Connect UnitThe overhead cross-connect unit cross-connects the overheads from the auxiliary unit, controland communication unit, and other boards, and thus the following functions are realized.

l The DCC processed by the control and communication unit is added/dropped to/from theline.

l The orderwire and asynchronous data is added/dropped to/from the line.l The orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between lines can be interworked.

Control and Communication UnitThe control and communication unit is composed of a CPU and its peripheral circuit. This unitperforms the following functions:

l Controls and manages the IDU and other boards, and also collects alarms and performanceevents through the control bus.

l Controls and manages the ODU by the ODU control signal transmitted between the serialport and the SMODEM in the IF board.

l Communicates with the NM system by processing DCC bytes and the NM data that aretransmitted from the NM interface.

l Performs configuration management, performance management, and alarm managementaccording to NM commands.

l Performs protection management.

Power UnitOnly the SL61SCC of VER.B or VER.E provides the power unit.

The power unit performs the following functions:l Converts the input -48 V power into +3.3 V power.l Realizes the backup function of the internal power modules.l Supplies power to the chips on the SCC.

3.16.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, management and auxiliary interfaces, one reset switch, one indicator testswitch, and labels on the front panel.



3-147

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-59 SCC front panel

SC

C

SC

CETH ETH-HUB

COMPHONE

ALM/AUX

LAM

PTE

ST

RS

T

SYSTEMSTA

T

MA

NT

PR

OG

ALM

SC

C

SC

C

ETH ETH-HUBCOM

PHONEALM/S1

LAM

PTE

ST

RS

T

SYSTEMSTA

T

MA

NT

PR

OG

ALM

SCCVER.C and SCCVER.E

SCCVER.B

Indicators

Table 3-131 SCC indicator description





access.

PROG On: 100 ms (green)Off: 100 ms


On: 300 ms (green)Off: 300 ms


On (green) The upper layer software isbeing initiated.

On: 100 ms (red)Off: 100 ms





Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


On (red) l When the board is beingpowered on or beingreset, the memory self-check fails or loadingupper layer software fails.

l When the board isrunning, the logic files orupper layer software islost.

l The pluggable storagecard is faulty.


ALM On (green) The system is workingnormally.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the system.

On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in thesystem.

Off The system has no poweraccess.

MANT On (yellow) The system is in themaintenance state. Themaintenance state includesloopback, laser shutdown,and ODU transmitting insilence.

Off The system is in the workingstate.

Interfaces

Table 3-132 SCC interface description


PHONE Orderwire interface RJ-11 Orderwire line

COM Management port DB9 Serial port cable

ETH NM Ethernetinterface

RJ-45 Network cable

ETH-HUB NE cascade interface RJ-45 Network cable



3-149


ALM/AUX(SCCVER.C andSCCVER.E )ALM/S1(SCCVER.B)

l SCCVER.C andSCCVER.E :external alarminterface/synchronous datainterface/asynchronousdata interface

l SCCVER.B:external alarminterface/asynchronousdata interface

DB26 Auxiliary interfacecable

RST Ward reset switch - -

LAMP TEST Indicator test switcha - -

NOTE

a: Press the LAMP TEST button, and all the indicators of the IDU turn on except for the indicators on theEthernet interface. Release the button, and the indicators return to the original state.

For the pin assignments of the COM interface, see Figure 3-60 and refer to Table 3-133.

Figure 3-60 Pin assignments of the COM interface

Pos.9

Pos.1

Table 3-133 Pin assignments of the COM interface


COM 2 Receiving data

3 Transmitting data

4 Data terminal ready

5 Ground

1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9 Reserved




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

For the pin assignments of the ETH or the ETH-HUB connector, see Figure 3-61 and refer toTable 3-134.

Figure 3-61 Pin assignments of the ETH/ETH-HUB interface

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-134 Pin assignments of the ETH/ETH-HUB interface


ETH/ETH-HUB 1 Transmitting data (+)

2 Transmitting data (-)

3 Receiving data (+)

6 Receiving data (-)

4, 5, 7, 8 Reserved

NOTEThe ETH/ETH-HUB interface supports MDI/MDI-X auto-sensing, which means it can also transmit datathrough pins 3 and 6, and receive data through pins 1 and 3.

The ETH/ETH-HUB interface has two indicators. For the description of the two indicators, referto Table 3-135.

Table 3-135 ETH/ETH-HUB indicator description


LINK (green) On The link is normal.

Off The link fails.

ACT (yellow) On or flashing The port is transmitting or receivingdata.

Off The port is not transmitting or receivingdata.



3-151

CAUTIONThe ETH and the ETH-HUB are like two ports of a hub. When the two ports are used innetworking, they cannot be connected to each other through Ethernet links. Otherwise, anEthernet loop is formed which can result in a network storm and repeated NE resetting. Figure3-62 shows two wrong connection modes.

Figure 3-62 Wrong connection of the ETH and the ETH-HUB interfaces

SC

C

SC

C

ETH ETH-HUBCOM PHONEALM/AUX

LAM

PTE

ST

RST

SYSTEMSTAT

MAN

T

PR

OG

ALM

LAN

SC

C

SC

C

ETH ETH-HUBCOM PHONEALM/AUX

LAM

PTE

ST

RST

SYSTEMSTAT

MAN

T

PR

OG

ALM

For the pin assignments of the ALM/AUX interface, see Figure 3-63 and refer toTable 3-136.

Figure 3-63 Pin assignments of the ALM/AUX interface

Pos.1

Pos.26

Table 3-136 Pin assignments of the ALM/AUX (ALM/S1) interface


ALM/AUX(ALM/S1)

1 The 1st input alarm signal

10 Ground of the 1st input alarm signal

19 The 2nd input alarm signal




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


2 Ground of the 2nd input alarm signal

11 The 3rd input alarm signal

20 Ground of the 3rd input alarm signal

3 The 1st output alarm signal (+)

21 The 1st output alarm signal (-)

4 The 4th input alarm signal

13 Ground of the 4th input alarm signal





6 The 2nd output alarm signal (+)

24 The 2nd output alarm signal (-)

16 The asynchronous interfacetransmitting data

8 The asynchronous interface receivingdata

25 Signal ground

7 The synchronous data interfacereceiving data (+)

9 Signal ground

12 The synchronous data interfacereceiving data (-)

15 The synchronous data interfacetransmitting data (+)

17 The synchronous data interfacetransmitting data (-)

18, 26 Reserved

NOTE

The SCC of VER.B does not support the synchronous data interface. Hence, pins 7, 12, 15, and 17 of theALM/AUX interface cannot be used.



3-153

LabelsThere is a high temperature warning label and an operation warning label on the front panel.

The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. In this case, you need to wear protectivegloves before touching the board.

3.16.5 Jumpers and Storage CardThe SCC PCB board has one group of jumpers and one pluggable storage card.

The storage card stores the following information:

l All the data of the NE, including the NE ID, NE IP address, and service datal NE software and all the board software programsl All the FPGA logicsl License file for radio link capability

Figure 3-64 Positions of the jumpers and storage card

2

1

JUMP1JUMP2JUMP3JUMP4

2

1

JUMP4JUMP3

JUMP2JUMP1

SL61SCCVER.B

Jumper definition

10

21

9

JUMP1JUMP2JUMP3JUMP4

SL61SCCVER.C or SL61SCCVER.E

1. Jumpers 2. Storage card




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Table 3-137 Setting the jumpers

Jumper Setting (1: disconnected, 0: short circuit) Function

JUMP4 JUMP3 JUMP2 JUMP1

0 0 0 0 Normaloperating state.

0 0 0 1 Reserved.

0 0 1 0 Reserved.

0 0 1 1 Commissioningstate.

0 1 0 0 Operating state,with theWatchDogdisabled andmemoryundergone fullcheck.

0 1 0 1 BIOS holdoverstate. Even if theNE softwareexists, it is notrunning. The IPaddress isalways129.9.0.5. TheIP in theparameter areadoes not changefor theconvenience ofquerying.

0 1 1 0 Exhibitionmode.

0 1 1 1 Data recoverstate.

1 0 0 0 Reserved.

1 0 0 1 Reserved.

1 0 1 0 To erase thesystemparameter area.

1 0 1 1 To erasedatabase.



3-155

Jumper Setting (1: disconnected, 0: short circuit) Function

JUMP4 JUMP3 JUMP2 JUMP1

1 1 0 0 To erase NEsoftware and itspatches.

1 1 0 1 To erasedatabase, NEsoftware and itspatches.

1 1 1 0 To format thefile system sothat all the datais erased.

1 1 1 1 To format thefile system sothat all the datais erased (filesystem +extended BIOS+ systemparameter area).

3.16.6 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the SCC is installed in slot 2.

Figure 3-65 Slot of the SCC in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

NOTEAn SCC integrates an EOW subboard which occupies the logical slot 21.

3.16.7 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters you may frequently set are as follows: the NE ID/IPaddress, orderwire interface parameters, synchronous data interface parameters, andasynchronous data interface parameters.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

NE IDThe NE ID is a 24-bit hexadecimal number, which is used to identify the NE in ECCcommunication. The higher 8 bits of an NE ID are called the subnet ID, or the extended ID,whereas the lower 16 bits are called the basic ID. For example, for the NE ID 0x090001, "9" isthe subnet ID or extended ID and "1" is the basic ID.

By default, the NE ID is 0x09BFF0, with the subnet ID or extended ID as "9" and the basic IDas "49136".

NE IP AddressIP addresses are used and thus are valid only in TCP/IP communication.

By default, the NE IP address is 129.9.191.240.

Orderwire Interface ParametersOrderwire interface parameters include the orderwire phone number and the overhead byte usedto transmit orderwire.

The orderwire phone number is used to identify the phone in point-to-point addressing call. Thisparameter is set based on the orderwire planning. Generally, the orderwire phone number is setwith three digits.

The overhead byte used to transmit orderwire can be set to use the E1 or E2 byte, however, thissetting is invalid for SDH/PDH microwave links because the microwave system always uses amicrowave self-defined byte to transmit orderwire, regardless of whether the E1 or E2 byte isset.

Synchronous Data Interface ParametersIn the case of optical and electrical SDH lines, the synchronous data interface always uses theF1 byte. In the case of SDH/PDH microwave links, the synchronous data interface always usesa microwave self-defined byte.

Asynchronous Interface ParametersAsynchronous interface parameters include the asynchronous data interface type and theoverhead byte used to transmit asynchronous data.

The asynchronous data interface type is RS-232.

The overhead byte used to transmit asynchronous data can be set to any byte of Serial 1 to Serial4, as shown in Figure 3-66. This setting is, however, invalid for SDH/PDH microwave linksbecause the microwave system always uses a microwave self-defined byte to transmit orderwire,regardless of which serial byte is set.



3-157

Figure 3-66 Positions of Serial 1 to Serial 4 overhead bytes in an SDH frame

A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0B1 E1 F1

D1 D2 D3 Serial 1 Serial 2AU- PTRB2 B2 B2 K1 K2D4 Serial 4 D5 D6D7 D8 D9D10 D11 D12 Serial 3S1 M1 E2

3.16.8 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including orderwire interface performance,synchronous data interface performance, asynchronous data interface performance, boardmechanical behavior, and power consumption.

Orderwire Interface Performance

Table 3-138 Orderwire interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Orderwire type Addressing call


One symmetrical wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 600

NOTE

The OptiX RTN equipment supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTNequipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, the orderwire phones of all the OptiXRTN equipment in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwirephone call is established.

Synchronous Data Interface Performance

Table 3-139 Synchronous data interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-definedbyte in the overhead of the microwave frame.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Item Performance


Interface type Codirectional

Interface characteristics Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

Asynchronous Data Interface

Table 3-140 Asynchronous data interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or theHuawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) ≤ 19.2

Interface characteristics Meets the RS-232 standard.


Table 3-141 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SCC

Item Description


Weight 500g (SCCVER.B)330g (SCCVER.C)510g (SCCVER.E)


3.17 Fan Tray AssemblyThe IDU 620 adopts wind-cooling and thus is configured with the fan tray assembly.

3.17.1 CompositionThe fan tray assembly is composed of the front panel, air filter, and fan board. In a dust-proofenvironment such as an outdoor cabinet, the fan tray assembly is configured with no air filter.

3.17.2 Version DescriptionThe fan board in the fan tray assembly has two functional versions, namely, SL61FAN andSL61FANA.

3.17.3 Functions and Features



3-159

The fan tray assembly is used to dissipate heat from the IDU by using the method of wind cooling.

3.17.4 Working PrincipleThis section considers the SL61FANA version as an example to describe the working principleof the fan board in the fan tray assembly.

3.17.5 Front PanelThere is the fan status indicator on the front panel of the fan tray assembly.

3.17.6 Valid SlotsThe fan tray assembly is installed on the left side of the IDU 620 and occupies slot 20.

3.17.1 CompositionThe fan tray assembly is composed of the front panel, air filter, and fan board. In a dust-proofenvironment such as an outdoor cabinet, the fan tray assembly is configured with no air filter.

Figure 3-67 Fan tray assembly composition

Panel

Air filter

Fan board

3.17.2 Version DescriptionThe fan board in the fan tray assembly has two functional versions, namely, SL61FAN andSL61FANA.

Table 3-142 Differences between SL61FAN and SL61FANA

Item SL61FAN SL61FANA

Number of fans 6 3

Power -48 V +3.3 V




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

3.17.3 Functions and FeaturesThe fan tray assembly is used to dissipate heat from the IDU by using the method of wind cooling.

The fan tray assembly also supports the following functions:

l Detecting faults in the fan and reports alarms.l Querying the manufacturing information.

3.17.4 Working PrincipleThis section considers the SL61FANA version as an example to describe the working principleof the fan board in the fan tray assembly.


Figure 3-68 Block diagram of the fan board

Controland

detectionunit

SCC

Powerunit +3.3V

+3.3V+12V

Backplane

Fan unit

Power UnitThe power unit converts the input +3.3 V power into the +12 V power according to therequirement of the fan unit. The 1+1 power standby protection is also provided for the system.In addition, the power unit provides +3.3 V power for the control and detection unit.

Fan UnitThe fan unit consists of three fans that work at the same time to dissipate heat from the IDU.The fan unit integrates a detection circuit, so that the fan unit can report the fan status and alarmsto the control and detection unit.

Control and Detection UnitPoint-to-point communication is performed between the control and detection unit and the SCC.The functions of the control and detection unit are as follows:l Reports the fan status and alarms to the SCC.l Provides the manufacturing information for the SCC.

3.17.5 Front PanelThere is the fan status indicator on the front panel of the fan tray assembly.



3-161

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-69 FAN front panel

禁止接触风扇叶片!

DON'T TOUCH THEFAN LEAVE !

FAN

ATTENTIONCLEAN PERIODICALLY!

Indicators

Table 3-143 FAN indicator description


FAN On (green) The fan is working normally.

On (red) The fan is faulty.


3.17.6 Valid SlotsThe fan tray assembly is installed on the left side of the IDU 620 and occupies slot 20.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Figure 3-70 Slot of the fan tray assembly in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2



3-163

4 Accessories

About This Chapter

The accessories of the IDU include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit (PDU). Youcan select the accessories depending on the requirements.

4.1 E1 PanelWhen an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. TheE1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU.

4.2 PDUThe PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the inputpower to the equipment in the cabinet.

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description 4 Accessories


4-1

4.1 E1 PanelWhen an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. TheE1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU.

The dimensions of the E1 panel are 483 mm x 33 mm x 42 mm (width x depth x height). An E1panel provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panelR1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16

1-8

9-16

Interfaces

Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel

Interface Description Type of Connector

T1-T16 Transmit port of the 1st to16th E1 ports (connected tothe external equipment)

BNC

R1-R16 Receive port of the 1st to 16thE1 ports (connected to theexternal equipment)

1-8 1st to 8th E1 ports (connectedto an IDU)

DB37

9-16 9th to 16th E1 ports(connected to an IDU)

Grounding bolt Connecting a protectionground cable

-

NOTE

The interface impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.

For the pin assignments of the E1 port that is connected to an IDU, see Figure 4-2 and refer toTable 4-2.

4 AccessoriesOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System



Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)

Pos. 1

Pos. 37

Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)


20 1st E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

21 1st E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

2 1st E1 receiving differentialsignal (-)

3 1st E1 transmitting differentialsignal (-)

22 2nd E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

23 2nd E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

4 2nd E1 receiving differentialsignal (-)

5 2nd E1 transmitting differentialsignal (-)

24 3rd E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

25 3rd E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

6 3rd E1 receiving differentialsignal (-)

7 3rd E1 transmitting differentialsignal (-)

26 4th E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

27 4th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

8 4th E1 receiving differentialsignal (-)

9 4th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (-)















4-3






Others Reserved - -

4.2 PDUThe PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the inputpower to the equipment in the cabinet.

4.2.1 Front PanelThere are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switcheson the front panel of the PDU.

4.2.2 Functions and Working PrincipleThe PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input powerto the equipment in a cabinet.

4.2.3 Power Distribution ModeThe IF1A and IF0A boards support two power distribution modes: DC-I and DC-C. The defaultpower distribution mode is the DC-C mode.

4.2.1 Front PanelThere are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switcheson the front panel of the PDU.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-3 PDU front panel

NEG2(-)

INPUT

RTN2(+)RTN1(+) NEG1(-)

3

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

1 2 3 4

1 4

1 2 3 4

OUTPUT OUTPUTA B

2

20A20A 20A 20A20A20A 20A 20A

5 6

1. Output power terminals (A) 2. PGND3. Input power terminals 4. Output power terminals (B)5. Power switches (A) 6. Power switches (B)

Interfaces

Table 4-3 PDU interface description

Position Interface Description

Output powerterminals (A)

+ Power output (+)

- Power output (-)

PGND (Groundingstud of the two-hole OTterminal)

For connecting the protection grounding cable

Input powerterminals

RTN1(+) The 1st power input (+)

RTN2(+) The 2nd power input (+)

NEG1(-) The 1st power input (-)

NEG2(-) The 2nd power input (-)

Output powerterminals (B)

+ Power output (+)

- Power output (-)



4-5

Position Interface Description

Powerswitches (A)

20 A They are switches for the power outputs. The fusecapacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the rightcorrespond to output power terminals 1-4 on the A siderespectively.

Powerswitches (B)

20 A They are switches for the power outputs. The fusecapacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the rightcorrespond to output power terminals 1-4 on the B siderespectively.

4.2.2 Functions and Working PrincipleThe PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input powerto the equipment in a cabinet.

Functionsl The PDU supports two inputs of -48 V/-60 V DC power.l Each input power supply supports four outputs.l The fuse capacity of the switch of each power output is 20 A.l The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes.

Working PrincipleThe PDU primarily consists of input terminals, output terminals, and miniature circuit breakers(MCBs). The PDU provides the simple power distribution function for the input power.

Figure 4-4 Block diagram of the PDU working principle

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

SW1

SW2

SW4

SW4

INPUT

RTN1(+)

RTN2(+)

NEG1(-)

NEG2(-)

+ 1-+ 2-

+ 3-+ 4-

+ 1-+ 2-

+ 3-+ 4-

OUTPUT A

OUTPUT B

PGND

BGND

BGND




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

4.2.3 Power Distribution ModeThe IF1A and IF0A boards support two power distribution modes: DC-I and DC-C. The defaultpower distribution mode is the DC-C mode.

The power distribution mode of the PDU is controlled by the short-circuiting copper bar that isinside the PDU.

DC-C Power Distribution ModeWhen the DC-C power distribution mode is used, the short-circuiting copper bar short-circuitsterminal RTN1(+), terminal RTN2(+), and the PGND.

Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in the DC-C mode

DC-I Power Distribution ModeTo use the DC-I power distribution mode, remove the short-circuiting copper bar.



4-7

Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in the DC-I mode




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

5 Cables

About This Chapter

This section describes the purpose, appearance, and connections of various cables of the IDU.

5.1 Power CableThe power cable connects the power supply system such as the power distribution box on thetop of the cabinet to the PXC of the IDU to carry the -48 V power into the OptiX RTN 620system.

5.2 Protection Ground CableThe IDU, ODU, and E1 panel need to be grounded through their own protection ground cables.

5.3 IF JumperThe IF jumper is used to connect the ODU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used together withthe IF cable to transmit the IF signal between the ODU and the IDU, O&M signal, and -48 Vpower.

5.4 XPIC CableThe XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX boards of theXPIC working group to realize the XPIC function.

5.5 Fiber JumperFiber jumpers are used to transmit optical signals. Fiber jumpers use LC/PC connectors at oneend to connect the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface. The connectors at the otherend of fiber jumpers depend on the type of optical interfaces of the equipment to be connected.

5.6 E1 CableThe E1 cables are available in four types: the E1 cables (with DB44 connectors) to the externalequipment, the E1 cables (with RJ-45 connectors) to the external equipment, the E1 cables tothe E1 panel, and the E1 transit cables.

5.7 External Clock Cable/Wayside Service Cable/STM-1e CableExternal clock cables, wayside service cables, and STM-1e cables use the same type of coaxialcables. This type of coaxial cable uses the SMB connector at one end to connect the PXC, SLE/SDE or PL3 board. The other end of the cable connects the DDF. The connectors are made asrequired by the site.

5.8 Auxiliary Interface CableAuxiliary interface cables are used to input/output external alarms, synchronous interface data,and asynchronous interface data. The cable uses a DB26 connector at one end to connect to the

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description 5 Cables


5-1

ALM/AUX interface on the SCC board. The other end of the cable is divided into four wires,which are wire W1, wire W2, wire W3, and wire W4. Wire W4 is terminated with one DB37connector and is connected to the external alarm equipment through an alarm transfer cable.Wire W2 is terminated with one DB9 connector and is connected to the equipment that is usedto transmit asynchronous data through a serial port cable. Wire W1 is also terminated with oneDB9 connector but the DB9 connector is reserved for future use. Wire W3 is not terminated witha connector and is used to transmit synchronous data.

5.9 External Alarm Transit CableExternal alarm transit cables are used to transit external alarm data. The cable uses the DB37connector at one end to connect the external alarm and asynchronous interface cable. The otherend of the cable connects external alarm equipment. The connectors are made as required by thesite. The external alarm transit cable transits two alarm outputs and six alarm inputs.

5.10 Serial Port CableSerial port cables are used for the management and maintenance of the OptiX RTN 620. Thecable uses the DB9 connectors at both ends, one for connecting the COM interface of the SCCboard, the other for connecting the computer, NM serial, or modem. Serial port cables are alsoused to transit asynchronous data services. In this case, the cable connects the external alarmand asynchronous interface cable and the equipment that transmits asynchronous data.

5.11 Orderwire LineThe orderwire line is used to connect orderwire phone sets. Both ends of the line use RJ-11connectors. One end connects the PHONE interface of the SCC board and the other end connectsthe interface of the orderwire phone set.

5.12 Network CableNetwork cables are used to connect Ethernet equipment. Both ends of a network cable use RJ-45connectors.

5 CablesOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System



Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

5.1 Power CableThe power cable connects the power supply system such as the power distribution box on thetop of the cabinet to the PXC of the IDU to carry the -48 V power into the OptiX RTN 620system.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-1 Diagram of the power cable

X3

M0201 Main label

Two cable ties

2

X2200mm

500mmL

100mmX1

AA3

A2

A1

ALabel

1. Cable connector, type-D, 3 female 2. Single cord end terminal

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-1 Power cable connections

Cable Connector Cord EndTerminal

Connections Color of Core Wire

X1.A1 X2 A1 connects to X2. Blue (-48 V power)

X1.A3 X3 A3 connects to X3. Black (powerground)

5.2 Protection Ground CableThe IDU, ODU, and E1 panel need to be grounded through their own protection ground cables.

5.2.1 IDU Protection Ground Cable



5-3

The protection ground cable connects the ground point of the IDU to the ground point of theexternal equipment such as the ground support of a cabinet so that the IDU and other equipmentshare the same ground.

5.2.2 E1 Protection Ground Cable of an E1 PanelThe protection ground cable connects the left ground screw of an E1 panel to the ground pointof the external equipment such as the ground support of a cabinet, so that the E1 panel and otherequipment share one ground.

5.2.1 IDU Protection Ground CableThe protection ground cable connects the ground point of the IDU to the ground point of theexternal equipment such as the ground support of a cabinet so that the IDU and other equipmentshare the same ground.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-2 Diagram of the IDU protection ground cable

2

Main label

H.S.TubeCable Tie1

L

1. Bare crimping terminal, OT2 2. Bare crimping terminal, OT


Table 5-2 IDU protection ground cable connections

Equipment Side Grounding BarSide

Connections Color of Wire

OT2 OT - yellow-green




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

5.2.2 E1 Protection Ground Cable of an E1 PanelThe protection ground cable connects the left ground screw of an E1 panel to the ground pointof the external equipment such as the ground support of a cabinet, so that the E1 panel and otherequipment share one ground.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-3 Diagram of the protection ground cable of an E1 panel

1

Main label

L

1. Bare crimping terminal, OT

Cable Connection TableNone.

5.3 IF JumperThe IF jumper is used to connect the ODU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used together withthe IF cable to transmit the IF signal between the ODU and the IDU, O&M signal, and -48 Vpower.

NOTE

No IF jumper is required if the 5D type IF cable is used. The 5D type IF cable is connected to the IF boardthrough a TNC connector.

For details about the IF cable, see ODU Hardware Description.

The IF jumper is a 2 m RG223 cable. The IF jumper uses a type-N connector at one end toconnect to the IF cable, and a TNC connector at the other end to connect to the IF board.



5-5

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-4 View of the IF jumper

1

2H.S.tube 2PcsL=3cm

2000mm

1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male 2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female


5.4 XPIC CableThe XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX boards of theXPIC working group to realize the XPIC function.

The XPIC cable is an RG316 cable with SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPICcable is connected to the XPIC IN port of one IFX board of an XPIC working group, and theother end of the XPIC cable is connected to the XPIC OUT port of the other IFX board of thesame XPIC working group.

When the XPIC function of an IFX board is disabled, use an XPIC cable to connect the XPICIN port and XPIC OUT port of the IFX board to loop back signals.

The XPIC cable is available in the following two types:

l XPIC cable using angle connectors: The XPIC cable using angle connectors is very long,and is used to connect the two IFX boards in the horizontal direction, for example, the IFXboards in slots 5 and 6 or the IFX boards in slots 7 and 8.

l XPIC cable using straight connectors: The XPIC cable using straight connectors is veryshort, and is used to connect the two IFX boards in the vertical direction, for example, theIFX boards in slots 5 and 7 or the IFX boards in slots 6 and 8. The XPIC cable using straightconnectors is also used to connect the XPIC IN port and XPIC OUT port of the same IFXboard to loop back signals.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable

L1

1 1

L2

2 2

1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male 2. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, straight, male


5.5 Fiber JumperFiber jumpers are used to transmit optical signals. Fiber jumpers use LC/PC connectors at oneend to connect the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface. The connectors at the otherend of fiber jumpers depend on the type of optical interfaces of the equipment to be connected.

Types of fiber jumpers

Table 5-3 Types of fiber jumpers

Connector 1 Connector 2 Type of Fiber Jumper

LC/PC FC/PC 2-mm single-mode fiber

2-mm multi-mode fiber

LC/PC SC/PC 2-mm single-mode fiber




5-7

Connector 1 Connector 2 Type of Fiber Jumper

LC/PC LC/PC 2-mm single-mode fiber


NOTEFThe Ie-1.1 optical interface and the 1000Base-SX GE optical interface use multi-mode fibers.

Fiber Connectors

The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors. They are LC/PCconnectors, SC/PC connectors, and FC/PC connectors.

Figure 5-6 LC/PC fiber connector

Figure 5-7 SC/PC fiber connector




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Figure 5-8 FC/PC fiber connector

5.6 E1 CableThe E1 cables are available in four types: the E1 cables (with DB44 connectors) to the externalequipment, the E1 cables (with RJ-45 connectors) to the external equipment, the E1 cables tothe E1 panel, and the E1 transit cables.

The following E1 cables can be delivered together with the equipment:l The E1 cables to the external equipment(with DB44 connectors)l The E1 cables to the E1 panel (DB44-DB37)l The E1 transit cables (MDR68-DB44)

The E1 cables (with RJ-45 connectors) to the external equipment need to be made on site byterminating network cables with RJ-45 connectors. The description of the E1 cables (with RJ-45connectors) to the external equipment is not provided in this topic.

5.6.1 DB44 E1 CableWhen the SL61PO1/PH1 board directly inputs/outputs E1 signals from/to the externalequipment, use this DB44 E1 cable to connect the SL61PO1/PH1 board to the externalequipment. Use a DB44 connector at the end of the E1 cable that is near the SL61PO1/PH1board. Make a connector for the other end that is near the external equipment as required by thesite.

5.6.2 DB44-DB37 E1 CableWhen an IDU uses an E1 panel as the DDF, use this DB44-DB37 E1 cable to connect theSL61PO1/PH1 board to the E1 panel. Use a DB44 connector at the end of the E1 cable that isnear the SL61PO1/PH1 board, and use a DB37 connector at the other end that is near the E1panel.

5.6.3 MDR68-DB44 E1 CableAn MDR68-DB44 E1 cable is used to transit an E1 port of a PD1 board. The cable uses anMDR68 connector at one end to connect a PD1 board, and uses a DB44 connector at the otherend to connect an DB44 E1 cable or an DB44-DB37 E1 panel.



5-9

5.6.1 DB44 E1 CableWhen the SL61PO1/PH1 board directly inputs/outputs E1 signals from/to the externalequipment, use this DB44 E1 cable to connect the SL61PO1/PH1 board to the externalequipment. Use a DB44 connector at the end of the E1 cable that is near the SL61PO1/PH1board. Make a connector for the other end that is near the external equipment as required by thesite.

The DB44 E1 cables that are connected to the external equipment are categorized into 75-ohmcoaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables, and one E1 cable transmits eight E1 signals.The 75-ohm coaxial cables are further categorized into 2x8 core cables and 1x16 core cables.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-9 Diagram of the 75-ohm cable (2x8 core cable)

L

Label 1Main label

A

Pos.1

Label 2

Label 1

Label 2

W1

W2

APos.44 1

1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male Label 1: W1 (E1: 1 to 4) Label 2: W2 (E1: 5 to 8)




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Figure 5-10 Diagram of the 75-ohm cable (1x16 core cable)

L

Main label

A

W

APos.44 1

Pos.1

1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male

Figure 5-11 Diagram of the 120-ohm cable

L

Label 1Main label

A

Pos.1

Label 2

Label 1

Label 2

W1

W2

APos.44 1

1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male Label 1: W1 (TX1 to TX8) Label 2: W2 (RX1 to RX8)



5-11


Table 5-4 75-ohm E1 cable connections (2x8 core cable)

Pin Cable W1 Remarks


Core SerialNumber

Core SerialNumber

38 Ring 1 R1 34 Ring 1 R5

23 Tip 19 Tip


22 Tip 18 Tip


21 Tip 17 Tip


20 Tip 16 Tip

15 Ring 2 T1 11 Ring 2 T5

30 Tip 26 Tip


29 Tip 25 Tip


28 Tip 24 Tip


27 Tip 7 Tip

Shell Braid Shell Braid

Table 5-5 75-ohm E1 cable connections (1x16 core cable)

Pin Cable W Remarks

Pin Cable W Remarks

Core SerialNumber

Core SerialNumber


23 Tip 19 Tip

37 Ring 3 R2 33 Ring 11 R6




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Pin Cable W Remarks

Pin Cable W Remarks

Core SerialNumber

Core SerialNumber

22 Tip 18 Tip

36 Ring 5 R3 32 Ring 13 R7

21 Tip 17 Tip

35 Ring 7 R4 31 Ring 15 R8

20 Tip 16 Tip

15 Ring 2 T1 11 Ring 10 T5

30 Tip 26 Tip

14 Ring 4 T2 10 Ring 12 T6

29 Tip 25 Tip


28 Tip 24 Tip


27 Tip 7 Tip


Table 5-6 120-ohm E1 cable connections



Color Relation

Color Relation

15 Blue Pair T1 38 Blue Pair R1

30 White 23 White

14 Orange Pair T2 37 Orange Pair R2

29 White 22 White

13 Green Pair T3 36 Green Pair R3

28 White 21 White

12 Brown Pair T4 35 Brown Pair R4

27 White 20 White

11 Grey Pair T5 34 Grey Pair R5



5-13



Color Relation

Color Relation

26 White 19 White

10 Blue Pair T6 33 Blue Pair R6

25 Red 18 Red

9 Orange Pair T7 32 Orange Pair R7

24 Red 17 Red

8 Green Pair T8 31 Green Pair R8

7 Red 16 Red


5.6.2 DB44-DB37 E1 CableWhen an IDU uses an E1 panel as the DDF, use this DB44-DB37 E1 cable to connect theSL61PO1/PH1 board to the E1 panel. Use a DB44 connector at the end of the E1 cable that isnear the SL61PO1/PH1 board, and use a DB37 connector at the other end that is near the E1panel.

Each E1 cable can transmit eight E1 signals. The interface impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-12 Diagram of the DB44-DB37 E1 cable

1500 mm

A

APos.1

Pos.44

1B

Pos.1

Pos.37

B

2

1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male 2. Cable connector, type-D, 37 male




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


Table 5-7 Connection table of the DB44-DB37 E1 cabl

ConnectorX1

ConnectorX2

Remarks ConnectorX1

ConnectorX2

Remarks

X1.38 X2.20 R1 X1.34 X2.36 R5

X1.23 X2.2 X1.19 X2.17

X1.37 X2.22 R2 X1.33 X2.34 R6

X1.22 X2.4 X1.18 X2.15

X1.36 X2.24 R3 X1.32 X2.32 R7

X1.21 X2.6 X1.17 X2.13

X1.35 X2.26 R4 X1.31 X2.30 R8

X1.20 X2.8 X1.16 X2.11

X1.15 X2.21 T1 X1.11 X2.35 T5

X1.30 X2.3 X1.26 X2.16

X1.14 X2.23 T2 X1.10 X2.33 T6

X1.29 X2.5 X1.25 X2.14

X1.13 X2.25 T3 X1.9 X2.31 T7

X1.28 X2.7 X1.24 X2.12

X1.12 X2.27 T4 X1.8 X2.29 T8

X1.27 X2.9 X1.7 X2.10


5.6.3 MDR68-DB44 E1 CableAn MDR68-DB44 E1 cable is used to transit an E1 port of a PD1 board. The cable uses anMDR68 connector at one end to connect a PD1 board, and uses a DB44 connector at the otherend to connect an DB44 E1 cable or an DB44-DB37 E1 panel.

An E1 transit cable can be connected to a 75-ohm E1 port or a 120-ohm E1 port.



5-15

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-13 Diagram of the MDR68-D44 E1 cable

Pos.1

Pos.68

Pos.44

Pos.1

Label2

Label1

A

B

X3

X2

X1

Main Label

400 mm

W1

W2

1. Cable connector, type-MDR, 68 male 2. Cable connector, type-D, 44 femaleLabel 1: "CHAN 0-7" Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"


Table 5-8 MDR68-DB44 E1 cable connections

Wire Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks

W1 X1.35 X2.38 R1 X1.2 X2.34 R5

X1.36 X2.23 X1.1 X2.19

X1.37 X2.15 T1 X1.4 X2.11 T5

X1.38 X2.30 X1.3 X2.26

X1.39 X2.37 R2 X1.6 X2.33 R6

X1.40 X2.22 X1.5 X2.18

X1.41 X2.14 T2 X1.8 X2.10 T6

X1.42 X2.29 X1.7 X2.25

X1.43 X2.36 R3 X1.10 X2.32 R7

X1.44 X2.21 X1.9 X2.17

X1.45 X2.13 T3 X1.12 X2.9 T7

X1.46 X2.28 X1.11 X2.24

X1.47 X2.35 R4 X1.14 X2.31 R8




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Wire Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks

X1.48 X2.20 X1.13 X2.16

X1.49 X2.12 T4 X1.16 X2.8 T8

X1.50 X2.27 X1.15 X2.7

W2 X1.19 X3.38 R9 X1.54 X3.34 R13

X1.20 X3.23 X1.53 X3.19

X1.21 X3.15 T9 X1.56 X3.11 T13

X1.22 X3.30 X1.55 X3.26

X1.23 X3.37 R10 X1.58 X3.33 R14

X1.24 X3.22 X1.57 X3.18

X1.25 X3.14 T10 X1.60 X3.10 T14

X1.26 X3.29 X1.59 X3.25

X1.27 X3.36 R11 X1.62 X3.32 R15

X1.28 X3.21 X1.61 X3.17

X1.29 X3.13 T11 X1.64 X3.9 T15

X1.30 X3.28 X1.63 X3.24

X1.31 X3.35 R12 X1.66 X3.31 R16

X1.32 X3.20 X1.65 X3.16

X1.33 X3.12 T12 X1.68 X3.8 T16

X1.34 X3.27 X1.67 X3.7

W1/W2 Shell Braid Shell Braid

5.7 External Clock Cable/Wayside Service Cable/STM-1eCable

External clock cables, wayside service cables, and STM-1e cables use the same type of coaxialcables. This type of coaxial cable uses the SMB connector at one end to connect the PXC, SLE/SDE or PL3 board. The other end of the cable connects the DDF. The connectors are made asrequired by the site.



5-17

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-14 Diagram of the external clock cable/wayside service cable/STM-1e cable

L

Main Label1

1. Coaxial cable connector, SMB, female


5.8 Auxiliary Interface CableAuxiliary interface cables are used to input/output external alarms, synchronous interface data,and asynchronous interface data. The cable uses a DB26 connector at one end to connect to theALM/AUX interface on the SCC board. The other end of the cable is divided into four wires,which are wire W1, wire W2, wire W3, and wire W4. Wire W4 is terminated with one DB37connector and is connected to the external alarm equipment through an alarm transfer cable.Wire W2 is terminated with one DB9 connector and is connected to the equipment that is usedto transmit asynchronous data through a serial port cable. Wire W1 is also terminated with oneDB9 connector but the DB9 connector is reserved for future use. Wire W3 is not terminated witha connector and is used to transmit synchronous data.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-15 Diagram of the auxiliary interface cable

A

B

500mm300mm

Main label

Label 1X2

Label 2 Label 3

1000mm

X3View C

C

X1

View A2

Pos.1

Pos.26

X4Pos.37

Pos.1

3

Pos.1

Pos.9

1View B

Label 5Label 6

Label 7Label 8

W1

W2

W3

W4

Label 4

1. Cable connector, type-D, 9 female 2. Cable connector, type-D, 26 male 3. Cable connector, type-D, 37female

Label 1: "OAM" Label 2: "S1" Label 3: "ALM"Label 4: "F1" Label 5: "F1-RX-TIP" Label 6: "F1-RX-RING"Label 7: "F1-TX-TIP" Label 8: "F1-TX-RING"

NOTE

In the preceding figure, "X3" indicates the asynchronous data interface, and "X2" indicates the reservedinterface.


Table 5-9 Auxiliary interface cable connections (1)

Connector X1 Connector X3 Wire color Relation Remarks

X1.8 X3.2 white - R

X1.16 X3.3 white Pair T

X1.25 X3.5 blue GND



5-19


ConnectorX1

ConnectorX4

Wire color Relation Remarks

X1.24 X4.1 white Pair Out 2B 1st channel(the 2nd-channeloutput alarminterface)

X1.6 X4.2 blue Out 2A

X1.21 X4.3 white Pair Out 1B 2nd channel(the 1st-channeloutput alarminterface)

X1.3 X4.4 orange Out 1A

X1.23 X4.5 white Pair IN-6-GND 3rd channel(the 6th-channelinput alarminterface)

X1.14 X4.6 green IN-6

X1.5 X4.7 white Pair IN-5-GND 4th channel(the 5th-channelinput alarminterface)

X1.22 X4.8 brown IN-5

X1.13 X4.9 white Pair IN-4-GND 5th channel(the 4th-channelinput alarminterface)

X1.4 X4.10 gray IN-4

X1.20 X4.11 red Pair IN-3-GND 6th channel(the 3rd-channelinput alarminterface)

X1.11 X4.12 blue IN-3

X1.2 X4.13 red Pair IN-2-GND 7th channel(the 2nd-channelinput alarminterface)

X1.19 X4.14 orange IN-2

X1.10 X4.15 red Pair IN-1-GND 8th channel(the 1st-channelinput alarminterface)

X1.1 X4.16 green IN-1




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


Connector X1 Label on Cable W3 Wirecolor

Relation

Remarks

X1.7 F1-RX-TIP white Pair Synchronous datainterface receivingdata (+)

X1.12 F1-RX-RING blue Synchronous datainterface receivingdata (-)

X1.15 F1-TX-TIP white Pair Synchronous datainterfacetransmitting data (+)

X1.17 F1-TX-RING orange Synchronous datainterfacetransmitting data (-)

5.9 External Alarm Transit CableExternal alarm transit cables are used to transit external alarm data. The cable uses the DB37connector at one end to connect the external alarm and asynchronous interface cable. The otherend of the cable connects external alarm equipment. The connectors are made as required by thesite. The external alarm transit cable transits two alarm outputs and six alarm inputs.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-16 Diagram of the external alarm transit cable

1

Pos.37

Pos.1

A

A

Main label

L




5-21

Cable Connection TableNOTE

The cable has five types of signal wires of different colors inside. There are eight blue wires, six grey wires,six pink wires, six green wires, and six orange wires. The signal cables of the same color are differentiatedby the red (RED) and black (BLK) dots on the cables. The cable with red dots is the signal cable. The cablewith black dots is defined as the ground. One "x" indicates that there is one dot at regular intervals. Forexample, a blue/redxxx cable refers to a blue signal cable on which there are three dots at regular intervals.

Table 5-12 External alarm transit cable connections

ConnectorX1

Color Relation

Remarks ConnectorX1

Color Relation

Remarks

1 Pink/Redx

Pair First channel (the 2nd-channel output alarminterface)

17 Green/Redxx

Pair 6thchannel

2 Pink/Blackx

18 Green/Blackxx

3 Orange/Redx

Pair Second channel (the 1st-channel output alarminterface)

19 Grey/Redxx

Pair 13thchannel

4 Orange/Blackx

20 Grey/Blackxx

5 Blue/Redx

Pair 8th channel (the 6th-channel input alarminterface)

21 Pink/Redxxx

Pair 14thchannel

6 Blue/Blackx

22 Pink/Blackxxx

7 Green/Redx

Pair 9th channel (the 5th-channel input alarminterface )

23 Orange/Redxxx

Pair 12thchannel

8 Green/Blackx

24 Orange/Blackxxx

9 Grey/Redx

Pair 3rd channel (the 4th-channel input alarminterface)

25 Blue/Redxxx

Pair 5thchannel

10 Grey/Blackx

26 Blue/Blackxxx




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

ConnectorX1

Color Relation

Remarks ConnectorX1

Color Relation

Remarks

11 Pink/Redxx

Pair 10th channel (the 3rd-channel input alarminterface

27 Green/Redxxx

Pair 11thchannel

12 Pink/Blackxx

28 Green/Blackxxx

13 Orange/Redxx

Pair 4th channel (the 2nd-channel input alarminterface

29 Grey/Redxxx

Pair 15thchannel

14 Orange/Blackxx

30 Grey/Blackxxx

15 Blue/Redxx

Pair 7th channel (the 1st-channel input alarminterface)

31 Blue/Redxxxx

Pair 16thchannel

16 Blue/Blackxx

32 Blue/Blackxxxx

5.10 Serial Port CableSerial port cables are used for the management and maintenance of the OptiX RTN 620. Thecable uses the DB9 connectors at both ends, one for connecting the COM interface of the SCCboard, the other for connecting the computer, NM serial, or modem. Serial port cables are alsoused to transit asynchronous data services. In this case, the cable connects the external alarmand asynchronous interface cable and the equipment that transmits asynchronous data.



5-23

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-17 Diagram of the serial port cable

Pos.9

Pos.1

1 Main lable

L

X1 X2

A

A



Table 5-13 Serial port cable connections

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relation

X1.3 X2.2 Pair

X1.2 X2.3

X1.5 X2.5 -

5.11 Orderwire LineThe orderwire line is used to connect orderwire phone sets. Both ends of the line use RJ-11connectors. One end connects the PHONE interface of the SCC board and the other end connectsthe interface of the orderwire phone set.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-18 Diagram of the orderwire wire

1

6

1

6

1 Main Label

X1 X2

1. Orderwire wire, RJ-11 connector




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


Table 5-14 Orderwire wire connections

Connector X1 Connector X2 Core

X1.3 X2.3 Tip

X1.4 X2.4 Ring

5.12 Network CableNetwork cables are used to connect Ethernet equipment. Both ends of a network cable use RJ-45connectors.

RJ-45 connectors have two types of interfaces. The first type is the medium dependent interface(MDI) used by terminal equipment such as network card. Refer to Table 5-15. The second typeis the MDI-X used by network equipment. Refer to Table 5-16.

Table 5-15 Pin assignments of the MDI













5-25

Table 5-16 Pin assignments of the MDI-X











Straight through cables are used between MDI and MDI-X interfaces, and crossover cables areused between MDI interfaces or between MDI-X interfaces. The only difference between thetwo network cables are the connections.

The ETH and ETH-HUB ports on the SCC board, the four FE ports on the EFT4 board and theGE/FE electrical ports on the EMS6 board support MDI/MDI-X auto-sensing. Thus, bothstraight through cables and crossover cables can be used between these ports and the MDI/MDI-X interfaces.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-19 Diagram of the network cable

1

8

1

8

1Label 1 Label 2Main Label

1. Network interface connector, RJ-45




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)


Table 5-17 Cable connection of the straight through cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation

X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange Pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White/Green Pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Pair

X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

Table 5-18 Cable connection of the crossover cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation

X1.6 X2.2 Orange Pair

X1.3 X2.1 White/Orange

X1.1 X2.3 White/Green Pair

X1.2 X2.6 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Pair

X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown



5-27

A Indicators, Weight and PowerConsumption of Boards

Indicators of Boards

Table A-1 IF1A/IF1B indicator description





access.









OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards


A-1












Table A-2 IFX indicator description





access.




A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of BoardsOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System


A-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 04 (2010-10-30)



XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal isnormal.

On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.

Off The XPIC function isdisabled.













Table A-3 IF0A/IF0B indicator description





A-3




access.





















Issue 04 (2010-10-30)



Table A-4 IFH2 indicator description


STAT On (green) The board is working normally.


Off l The board is not working.l The board is not created.l The board has no power access.


On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in theservices.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in theservices.

Off The services are not configured.



ODU On (green) The ODU is working normally.

On (red) The ODU has critical or major alarms.


Off The ODU is offline, or has no power access.


The actually received power of the ODU islower than the power to be received.

BER On (yellow) The microwave bit errors exceed thethreshold.

Off The microwave bit errors are in the normalrange.

RMT On (yellow) The remote system reports an RDI.

Off The remote system does not report an RDI.



A-5


ACT On (green) The board is in the active state (1+1protection).The board is activated (no protection).

Off The board is in the standby state (1+1protection).The board is not activated (no protection).

Table A-5 SL4 indicator description









LOS On (red) The optical interface of theSL4 reports the R_LOSalarm.

Off The optical interface of theSL4 has no R_LOS alarm.

Table A-6 SL1/SD1 indicator description







Issue 04 (2010-10-30)



access.





LOS1 On (red) The first optical interface ofthe SL1/SD1 reports theR_LOS alarm.

Off The first optical interface ofthe SL1/SD1 has no R_LOSalarm.

LOS2 On (red) The second optical interfaceof the SD1 reports theR_LOS alarm.

Off The second optical interfaceof the SD1 has no R_LOSalarm.

Table A-7 SLE/SDE indicator description





access.





A-7




Table A-8 PL3 indicator description









Table A-9 PO1/PH1/PD1 indicator description





access.






Issue 04 (2010-10-30)




Table A-10 EFT4 indicator description





access.





Table A-11 EMS6 indicator description









A-9




On (green) The upper layer software isbeing initialized.



















Issue 04 (2010-10-30)



Table A-12 Description of indicators on the EFP6









On (green) When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the upper layer software isbeing initialized.When the board is running,the software is runningnormally.







A-11





Table A-13 PXC indicator description





access.

PWR On (green) The power supply is workingnormally.

On (red) The +3.3 V power supply isfaulty, or the input -48 Vpower supply is abnormal.

Off There is no power access.

SYNC On (green) The clock is normal.

On (red) The clock source is lost.






Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Table A-14 SCC indicator description





access.

PROG On: 100 ms (green)Off: 100 ms


On: 300 ms (green)Off: 300 ms


On (green) The upper layer software isbeing initiated.

On: 100 ms (red)Off: 100 ms


On (red) l When the board is beingpowered on or beingreset, the memory self-check fails or loadingupper layer software fails.

l When the board isrunning, the logic files orupper layer software islost.

l The pluggable storagecard is faulty.


ALM On (green) The system is workingnormally.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the system.

On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in thesystem.



A-13


Off The system has no poweraccess.

MANT On (yellow) The system is in themaintenance state. Themaintenance state includesloopback, laser shutdown,and ODU transmitting insilence.

Off The system is in the workingstate.

Table A-15 FAN indicator description


FAN On (green) The fan is working normally.

On (red) The fan is faulty.


Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Table A-16 Weight of Boards

Board Weight Power Consumption

IF1A 420 g < 12.2 W

IF1B 400 g < 12.2 W

IFX 450 g < 14.5 W

IF0A 520 g < 13.7 W

IF0B 520 g < 13.7 W

IFH2 580 g < 16.4 W

SL4 290 g < 7.2 W

SL1 290 g < 3 W

SD1 300 g < 3.9 W

SLE 300 g < 4.2 W




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Board Weight Power Consumption

SDE 330 g < 4.9 W

PL3 310 g < 5.1 W

PO1 280 g < 2 W

PH1 310 g < 2.8 W

PD1 380 g < 5.8 W

EFT4 306 g < 7.5 W

EMS6 400 g < 12.3 W

EFP6 400 g < 11.6 W

PXC 540 g < 7.5 W

SCC 500g (SCCVER.B)330g (SCCVER.C)510g (SCCVER.E)

< 7.0 W

FAN 350 g < 9.7W



A-15

B Glossary

Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.

B.1 0-9

B.2 A-E

B.3 F-J

B.4 K-O

B.5 P-T

B.6 U-Z

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description B Glossary


B-1

B.1 0-91+1 protection An architecture that has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protection

SNC/trail and a permanent bridge. At the source end, the normal traffic signal ispermanently bridged to both the working and protection SNC/trail. At the sink end, thenormal traffic signal is selected from the better of the two SNCs/trails. Due to thepermanent bridging, the 1+1 architecture does not allow an extra unprotected trafficsignal to be provided.

1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)

802.1Q in 802.1Q 802.1Q in 802.1Q (QinQ) is a VLAN feature that allows the equipment to add a VLANtag to a tagged frame.The implementation of QinQ is to add a public VLAN tag to aframe with a private VLAN tag, making the frame encapsulated with two layers of VLANtags. The frame is forwarded over the service provider's backbone network based on thepublic VLAN tag. By this, a layer 2 VPN tunnel is provided to customers.The QinQfeature enables the transmission of the private VLANs to the peer end transparently.

B.2 A-E

A

ABR See Available Bit Rate

ACAP See adjacent channel alternate polarization

Access Control List Access Control List (ACL) is a list of IP address. The addresses listed in the ACL areused for authentication. If the ACL for the user is not null, it indicates that the addresswhere the user logged in is contained in the list.

ACL See Access Control List

adaptive modulation A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to thechannel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a high-efficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrumutilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adoptsthe low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of thelink that carries high-priority services.

ADC See Analog to Digital Converter

add/drop multiplexer Add/Drop Multiplexing. Network elements that provide access to all or some subset ofthe constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals areadded to (inserted), and/or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passedthrough the ADM.

Address ResolutionProtocol

Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses toMAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses throughARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the hostconverts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame.The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipmentthrough its IP address.

B GlossaryOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System


B-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

adjacent channelalternate polarization

A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontalpolarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.

ADM See add/drop multiplexer

Administrative Unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layerand the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher orderVC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative tothe multiplex section frame start.

AF See Assured Forwarding

AGC See Automatic Gain Control

aggregation A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete orconceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects.

AIS See Alarm Indication Signal

Alarm automaticreport

When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the N2000. Then,an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the details of the alarm.

alarm cascading The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.

Alarm Filtering An NE reports the detected alarm to the element management system (EMS). Based onthe filter state of the alarm, the EMS determines whether to display or save the alarminformation. If the filter state of an alarm is set to Filter, the alarm is not displayed orstored on the EMS. The alarm, however, is still monitored by the NE.

Alarm IndicationSignal

A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failurehas been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers. Note: SeeITU-T Rec. G.707/Y.1322 for specific AIS signals.

Alarm suppression A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be thenetworkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific functionmodule of a specific board.

AM See adaptive modulation

Analog to DigitalConverter

An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. Thereverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).

APS See Automatic Protection Switching

ARP See Address Resolution Protocol

ASK amplitude shift keying

Assured Forwarding Assured Forwarding (AF) is one of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by theDiff-Serv workgroup of IETF. AF is suitable for certain key data services that requireassured bandwidth and short delay. For traffic within the limit, AF assures quality inforwarding. For traffic that exceeds the limit, AF degrades the service class and continuesto forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets.

AsynchronousTransfer Mode

A data transfer technology based on cell, in which packets allocation relies on channeldemand. It supports fast packet switching to achieve efficient utilization of networkresources. The size of a cell is 53 bytes, which consist of 48-byte payload and 5-byteheader.

ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode

ATM PVC ATM Permanent Virtual Circuit



B-3

ATPC See automatic transmit power control

attenuator A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fibre Link. Generally used toensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.

AU See Administrative Unit

Automatic GainControl

A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as afunction of a specified parameter, such as received signal level.

Automatic ProtectionSwitching

Automatic Protection Switching (APS) is the capability of a transmission system todetect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover thetraffic.

automatic transmitpower control

A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detectedat the receiver

Available Bit Rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possibleforwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-timequality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.

B

Backward DefectIndication

When detecting a defect, the sink node of a LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI)to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.

bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in anetwork. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies thetransmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.

Base Station Controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworkswith the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It providesthe following functions: Radio resource management, Base station management, Powercontrol, Handover control, and Traffic measurement. One BSC controls and managesone or more BTSs in an actual network.

Base TransceiverStation

A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of trafficand signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radioequipment, and the antenna.

BDI See Backward Defect Indication

BE See best effort

BER See Bit Error Rate

best effort A kind of PHB (Per-Hop-Behavior). In the forwarding process of a DS domain, the trafficof this PHB type features reachability but the DS node does not guarantee the forwardingquality.

BIOS Basic Input Output System

BIP Bit-Interleaved Parity

bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the correspondingbit in the received digital signal.

Bit Error Rate Bit error rate. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index usedto measure the communications quality of a network.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

blank filler panel A piece of board to cover vacant slots, to keep the frame away from dirt, to keep properairflow inside the frame, and to beautify the frame appearance.

BPDU See Bridge Protocol Data Unit

Bridge Protocol DataUnit

The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN thatuses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information onports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it wasintended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in anetwork topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridgesinterfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.

Broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range isdetermined by the broadcast address.

BSC See Base Station Controller

BTS See Base Transceiver Station

Buffer A storage area used for handling data in transit. Buffers are used in internetworking tocompensate for differences in processing speed between network devices. Bursts of datacan be stored in buffers until they can be handled by slower processing devices.

C

C-VLAN Customer VLAN

Cable distribution plate A component which is used to arrange the cables in order.

cable ladder (1) A cable ladder is a frame which supports electrical cables. (2) Two metal cablesusually made of stainless steel with rungs of lightweight metal tubing such as aluminum,six or eight inches wide spaced about eighteen inches apart. It can be rolled into a compactlightweight bundle for transport ease.

cable tie The tape used to bind the cables.

cabling trough The trough which is used for cable routing in the cabinet.

captive nut Captive nuts (or as they are more correctly named, 'tee nuts') have a range of uses butare more commonly used in the hobby for engine fixing (securing engine mounts to thefirewall), wing fixings, and undercarriage fixing.

CAR See committed access rate

CBR See Constant Bit Rate

CCC See Circuit Cross Connect

CCDP See Co-Channel Dual Polarization

CCM See continuity check message

CE See Customer Edge

Central ProcessingUnit

The CPU is the brains of the computer. Sometimes referred to simply as the processoror central processor, the CPU is where most calculations take place.

CES See Circuit Emulation Service

CF See compact flash

CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol



B-5

CIR See Committed Information Rate

Circuit Cross Connect An implementation of MPLS L2VPN through the static configuration of labels.

Circuit EmulationService

A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At thetransmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATMcells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, theinterface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CEStechnology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the originalsequence at the reception end.

CIST See Common and Internal Spanning Tree

CIST root A switch of the highest priority is elected as the root in an MSTP network.

Class of Service A class object that stores the priority mapping rules. When network congestion occurs,the class of service (CoS) first processes services by different priority levels from highto low. If the bandwidth is insufficient to support all services, the CoS dumps the servicesof low priority.

Clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in anetwork.

Co-Channel DualPolarization

A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a verticalpolarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twicethe transmission capacity of the single polarization.

Coarse WavelengthDivision Multiplexing

A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels intothe same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDMdoes not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.

Colored packet A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors.

Combined cabinet Two or multiple BTS cabinets of the same type are combined to serve as one BTS.

committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classifiedinto QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission ratecan be defined.

CommittedInformation Rate

The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normalconditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred tothe leaky bucket.

Common and InternalSpanning Tree

Common and Internal Spanning Tree. The single Spanning Tree calculated by STP andRSTP together with the logical continuation of that connectivity through MST Bridgesand regions, calculatedby MSTP to ensure that all LANs in the Bridged Local AreaNetwork are simply and fully connected.

compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used inportable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory ina standardized enclosure.

Concatenation A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can beused a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.

connecting plate forcombining cabinets

A plate that connects two adjacent cabinet together at the cabinet top for fixing.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Connectivity Check Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved byeach MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically. This detectionis called CC detection.

Constant Bit Rate constant bit rate. A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transferscells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that dependon precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.

Constraint ShortestPath First

An extension of shortest path algorithms like OSPF and IS-IS. The path computed usingCSPF is a shortest path fulfilling set of constrains. It simply means that it runs shortestpath algorithm after pruning those links that violate a given set of constraints. Aconstraint could be minimum bandwidth required per link (also know as bandwidthguaranteed constraint), end-to-end delay, maximum number of link traversed etc. CSPFis widely used in MPLS Traffic Engineering. The routing using CSPF is known asConstraint Based Routing (CBR).

Constraint-basedRouted-LabelDistribution Protocol

An alternative to RSVP (Resource ReSerVation Protocol) in MPLS (MultiProtocolLabel Switching) networks. RSVP, which works at the IP (Internet Protocol) level, usesIP or UDP datagrams to communicate between LSR (Label Switched Routing) peers.RSVP does not require the maintenance of TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)sessions, although RSVP must assume responsibility for error control. CR-LDP isdesigned to facilitate the routing of LSPs (Label Switched Paths) through TCP sessionsbetween LSR peers through the communication of label distribution messages duringthe session.

continuity checkmessage

CCM is used to detect the link status.

corrugated tube A pipe which is used for fiber routing.

CoS See Class of Service

CPU See Central Processing Unit

CR-LDP See Constraint-based Routed-Label Distribution Protocol

CRC See Cyclic Redundancy Check

cross polarizationinterferencecancellation

A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminatethe cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.

CSPF See Constraint Shortest Path First

Customer Edge A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to theService Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.

CWDM See Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing

Cyclic RedundancyCheck

A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking usesa complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sendingdevice performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that itsends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation aftertransmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmissionwas error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmissionincludes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.



B-7

D

Data Circuit-terminalEquipment

Also Data Communications Equipment (DCE) and Data Carrier Equipment (DCE). Thebasic function of a DCE is to convert data from one interface, such as a digital signal, toanother interface, such as an analog signal. One example of DCE is a modem.

Data CommunicationNetwork

A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the DataCommunication Function (DCF).

Data CommunicationsChannel

The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal totransmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.

Datagram A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram,UDP datagram.

DC See Direct Current

DC-C See DC-Return Common (with Ground)

DC-I See DC-Return Isolate (with Ground)

DC-Return Common(with Ground)

A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited withthe PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line betweenthe output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.

DC-Return Isolate(with Ground)

A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited withthe PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGNDon the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.

DCC See Data Communications Channel

DCE See Data Circuit-terminal Equipment

DCN See Data Communication Network

DDF See Digital Distribution Frame

DDN See Digital Data Network

DE See discard eligible

Detour LSP The LSP that is used to re-route traffic around a failure in one-to-one backup.

diamond-shaped nut A type of nut that is used to fasten the wiring frame to the cabinet.

Differentiated Services A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a seriesof functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of per-hop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioningfunctions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing.

Differentiated ServicesCode Point

Differentiated Services CodePoint. A marker in the header of each IP packet using bits0-6 in the DS field. Routers provide differentiated classes of services to various servicestreams/flows based on this marker. In other words, routers select corresponding PHBaccording to the DSCP value.

DiffServ See Differentiated Services

Digital Data Network A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiberchannel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplextechnology.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Digital DistributionFrame

A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange withtransmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection,cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.

digital modulation A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of thecarrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, theinformation can be transmitted by the carrier.

Direct Current Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop orchange amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction.

discard eligible A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supportsthe FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet trafficexceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In thecase of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node.

Distance VectorMulticast RoutingProtocol

Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol. The DVMRP protocol is an Internetgateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical densemode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routingdatagrams with its neighbors.

DS boundary node A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in adomain that is not DS-capable.

DS domain In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group ofnetwork nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It providespoint-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain.

DS interior node A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node.

DS node A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.

DSCP See Differentiated Services Code Point

dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio wavesorthogonally polarized.

DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

E

E-AGGR Ethernet-Aggregation

E-LAN See Ethernet LAN

E-Tree See Ethernet-Tree

EBS See Excess Burst Size

ECC See Embedded Control Channel

EF See Expedited Forwarding

EFM See Ethernet in the First mile

Electro MagneticInterference

Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades orlimits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.



B-9

electromagneticcompatibility

Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunicationsequipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagneticenvironment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentionalelectromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.[NTIA]

ElectroStatic Discharge The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at differentelectrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.

Embedded ControlChannel

An ECC provides a logical operations channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a datacommunications channel (DCC) as its physical layer.

EMC See electromagnetic compatibility

EMI See Electro Magnetic Interference

Engineering label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.

EPLn See Ethernet Private LAN

equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate forthe changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.

ERPS See ethernet ring protection switching

ES-IS End System to Intermediate System

ESD See ElectroStatic Discharge

ESD jack Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf orcabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.

ETH-CC Ethernet Continuity Check

ETH-LB Ethernet Loopback

ETH-LT Ethernet Link Trace

Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/CollisionDetection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining..

Ethernet in the Firstmile

Last mile access from the broadband device to the user community. The EFM takes theadvantages of the SHDSL.bis technology and the Ethernet technology. The EFMprovides both the traditional voice service and internet access service of high speed. Inaddition, it meets the users' requirements on high definition television system (HDTV)and Video On Demand (VOD).

Ethernet LAN Ethernet LAN. A L2VPN service type that is provided for the user Ethernet in differentdomains over the PSN network. For the user Ethernet, the entire PSN network serves asa Layer 2 switch.

Ethernet Private LAN Both a LAN service and a private service. Transport bandwidth is never shared betweendifferent customers.

ethernet ringprotection switching

protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies.

Ethernet VirtualPrivate LAN

A service that is both a LAN service and a virtual private service.

Ethernet-Tree etherenet tree. An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint EthernetVirtual Connection.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

ETS European Telecommunication Standards

ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute

ETSI 300mm cabinet A cabinet which is 600mm in width and 300mm in depth, compliant with the standardsof the ETSI.

EuropeanTelecommunicationsStandards Institute

A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.

EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line

EVPLn See Ethernet Virtual Private LAN

Excess Burst Size excess burst size. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the traffic controlis realized by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter used to definethe capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when theinformation is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must belarger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximumlength of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

Exercise Switching An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. Theprotection switching is not really performed.

Expedited Forwarding Expedited Forwarding (EF) is the highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHBis suitable for services that demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broadbandwidth. In all the cases, EF traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or fasterthan the set rate. The DSCP value of EF PHB is "101110".

B.3 F-J

F

Failure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required functionto be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now beendetected.

Fast Ethernet A type of Ethernet with a maximum transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s. It complies withthe IEEE 802.3u standard and extends the traditional media-sharing Ethernet standard.

fast link pulse The likn pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation.

FCS Frame Check Sequence

FD See frequency diversity

FDI See Forward Defect Indication

FE See Fast Ethernet

FEC See Forward Error Correction

FFD Fast Failure Detection

Fiber Connector A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couplethe optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. Aconnector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source(or a detector).



B-11

fiber patch cord A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and forconnections between subracks or inside a subrack.

Field ProgrammableGate Array

A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit(ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as thePAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but alsoovercomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of thelimited number of gate arraies.

FIFO See First in First out

File Transfer Protocol A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computerson the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be anFTP client and the other an FTP server.

First in First out A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.

FLP See fast link pulse

Forced switch This function forces the service to switch from the working channel to the protectionchannel, with the service not to be restored automatically. This switch occurs regardlessof the state of the protection channels or boards, unless the protection channels or boardsare satisfying a higher priority bridge request.

Forward DefectIndication

Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of theLSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of thedefect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affectedhigher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.

Forward ErrorCorrection

A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload atthe transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated duringtransmission are corrected at the receive end.

Forwarding plane Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and canbe used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network.

FPGA See Field Programmable Gate Array

Fragment Piece of a larger packet that has been broken down to smaller units.

Fragmentation Process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network mediumthat can not support the original size of the packet.

frame A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame lengthis represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre-specified by the sending and receiving parties.

frequency diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certainfrequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is thenperformed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.

FTP See File Transfer Protocol

Full duplex The system that can transmit information in both directions on a communication link.Onthe communication link, both parties can send and receive data at the same time.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

G

gateway networkelement

A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer andthe NM application layer

GCP See GMPLS control plan

GE See Gigabit Ethernet

Generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This isto adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream routerto avoid packet discarding and congestion.

GFP Generic Framing Procedure

Gigabit Ethernet GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.Itruns at 1000Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not supportcoaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. IfGigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causingthe length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.

Global PositioningSystem

A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, andtiming services to worldwide users .

GMPLS control plan The OptiX GMPLS control plan (GCP) is the ASON software developed by Huawei.The OptiX GCP applies to the OptiX OSN product series. By using this software, thetraditional network can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN product seriessupport the ASON features.

GNE See gateway network element

GPS See Global Positioning System

GR See Graceful Restart

Graceful Restart In IETF, protocols related to Internet Protocol/Multiprotocol Label Switching (IP/MPLS) such as Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), Intermediate System-IntermediateSystem (IS-IS), Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), Label Distribution Protocol (LDP),and Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) are extended to ensure that the forwardingis not interrupted when the system is restarted. This reduces the flapping of the protocolsat the control plane when the system performs the active/standby switchover. This seriesof standards is called Graceful Restart.

Graphical UserInterface

A visual computer enviroment that represents programs, files, and options with graphicalimages, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.

ground resistance (electricity) Opposition of the earth to the flow of current through it; its value dependson the nature and moisture content of the soil, on the material, composition, and natureof connections to the earth, and on the electrolytic action present.

GTS See Generic traffic shaping

GUI See Graphical User Interface

guide rail Components to guide, position, and support plug-in boards.



B-13

H

H-QoS Hierarchical Quality of Service

HA See High Availability

half-duplex A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in bothdirections, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a partybegins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, beforereplying.

HDB3 High Density Bipolar Code 3

HDLC See High level Data Link Control procedure

High Availability The ability of a system to continuously perform its functions during a long period, whichmay exceeds the suggested working time of the independent components. You can obtainthe high availability (HA) by using the error tolerance method. Based on learning casesone by one, you must also clearly understand the limitations of the system that requiresan HA ability and the degree to which the ability can reach.

High level Data LinkControl procedure

A data link protocol from ISO for point-to-point communications over serial links.Derived from IBM's SDLC protocol, HDLC has been the basis for numerous protocolsincluding X.25, ISDN, T1, SS7, GSM, CDPD, PPP and others. Various subsets of HDLChave been developed under the name of Link Access Procedure (LAP).

High Speed DownlinkPacket Access

A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirementfor asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables themaximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing theWCDMA network topology.

Hold priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicatesthe highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by thetunnel can be preempted by other tunnels.

Hop A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop representsa small step on the route from one main computer to another.

hot standby A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables andstorage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. Whenthe faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services inthe faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entiresystem.

HP Higher Order Path

HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access

HSM Hitless Switch Mode

HTB High Tributary Bus

hybrid radio The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supportsthe AM function.

I

ICMP See Internet Control Messages Protocol

IDU See indoor unit




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

IEC See International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IETF The Internet Engineering Task Force

IF See intermediate frequency

IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol

IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol managesand controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet GroupManagement Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner,the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.

IMA See Inverse Multiplexing over ATM

indoor unit The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing,multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.

Inloop A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connectunit.

Institute of Electricaland ElectronicsEngineers

A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States butboasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.

Interface board area The area for the interface boards on the subrack.

intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RFsignal.

Intermediate System The basic unit in the IS-IS protocol used to transmit routing information and generateroutes.

Intermediate System toIntermediate System

A protocol used by network devices (routers) .IS-IS is a kind of Interior Gateway Protocol(IGP), used within the ASs. It is a link status protocol using Shortest Path First (SPF)algorithm to calculate the route.

Internal Spanning Tree Internal spanning tree. A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a specialMSTI whose ID is 0.

InternationalElectrotechnicalCommission

The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and non-governmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards.

InternationalOrganization forStandardization

ISO (International Organization for Standardization) is the world's largest developer andpublisher of International Standards.

Internet ControlMessages Protocol

ICMP belongs to the TCP/IP protocol suite. It is used to send error and control messagesduring the transmission of IP-type data packets.

Internet GroupManagement Protocol

The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups amongthe TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establishand maintain multicast group memberships.

Internet Protocol The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sentacross an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet deliveryservice. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. Theentire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the twofundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.



B-15

Internet ProtocolVersion 6

A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specificationsand standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering TaskForce (IETF).Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) is also called. It is a new version of theInternet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The specifications andstandardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force(IETF).The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits whilean IPv6 address has 128 bits.

Inverse Multiplexingover ATM

Inverse Multiplexing over ATM. The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involvesinverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among linksgrouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum ofthe link rates. This is referred to as an IMA group.

IP See Internet Protocol

IPv6 See Internet Protocol Version 6

IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System

ISO See International Organization for Standardization

IST See Internal Spanning Tree

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector

IVL Independence VLAN learning

J

Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control systeminstability.

B.4 K-O

L

L2VPN See Layer 2 virtual private network

Label Switched Path A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through labelswitching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based onnormal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.

Label Switching Router The Label Switching Router (LSR) is the basic element of MPLS network. All LSRssupport the MPLS protocol. The LSR is composed of two parts: control unit andforwarding unit. The former is responsible for allocating the label, selecting the route,creating the label forwarding table, creating and removing the label switch path; the latterforwards the labels according to groups received in the label forwarding table.

LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol

LAG See link aggregation group

LAN See Local Area Network

LAPD Link Access Procedure on the D channel

LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laserlight has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductorlaser as the light source.

layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmitsand distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is thesecond layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.

Layer 2 virtual privatenetwork

A virtual private network realized in the packet switched (IP/MPLS) network by Layer2 switching technologies.

LB See Loopback

LCAS See Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

LDPC Low-Density Parity Check code

line rate forwarding The line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.

Link AggregationControl Protocol

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is part of an IEEE specification (802.3ad)that allows you to bundle several physical ports to form a single logical channel. LACPallows a switch to negotiate an automatic bundle by sending LACP packets to the peer.

link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a linkaggregation group so that a MAC clientcan treat the link aggregation group as if it werea single link.

Link CapacityAdjustment Scheme

The Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) is designed to allow the dynamicprovisioning of bandwidth, using VCAT, to meet customer requirements.

Link Protection Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link isa downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection,the link protection should be provided.

LMSP Linear Multiplex Section Protection

Local Area Network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few squarekilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANsare generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).

Locked switching When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from beingswitched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has beenswitched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel tothe working channel.

LOF See Loss Of Frame

LOM Loss Of Multiframe

Loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that thesignal or message can be analyzed for errors.

LOP See Loss Of Pointer

LOS See Loss Of Signal

Loss Of Frame A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overheadindicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitorthe performance of the PHY layer.



B-17

Loss Of Pointer Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in thePHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start ofcell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.

Loss Of Signal Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the receivedsignal.

Lower subrack The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.

LP Lower Order Path

LPT Link State Path Through

LSP See Label Switched Path

LSR See Label Switching Router

M

MA See Maintenance Association

MAC See Medium Access Control

MAC See Media Access Control

MADM Multi Add-Drop Multiplexer

MaintenanceAssociation

That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, theconnectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of MaintenanceEntities.

Maintenanceassociation End Point

A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a ServiceInstance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is anend point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate MaintenanceEntity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association.

Maintenance Domain The Maintenance Domain (MD) refers to the network or the part of the network for whichconnectivity is managed by CFM. The devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.

Maintenance Point Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.

ManagementInformation Base

A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. Itcomprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such asrouters and switches) in a network.

Manual switching A protection switching. When the protection path is normal and there is no request of ahigher level switching, the service is manually switched from the working path to theprotection path, to test whether the network still has the protection capability.

Maximum TransferUnit

The MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) is the size of the largest datagram that can besent over a network.

MBS Maximum Burst Size

MCF See Message Communication Function

MD See Maintenance Domain

MDI See Medium Dependent Interface

Mean Time To Repair The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Media Access Control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of thedata link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connectingthe physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocolchecks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain controlinformation is added to the data, and then the data and the control information aretransmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MACprotocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmittedcorrectly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the controlinformation is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.

Medium AccessControl

A general reference to the low-level hardware protocols used to access a particularnetwork. The term MAC address is often used as a synonym for physical addresses.

Medium DependentInterface

The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the mediatransmission.

MEP See Maintenance association End Point

MessageCommunicationFunction

The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of managementinformation with their prs .

MIB See Management Information Base

MIP Maintenance Intermediate Point

MLPPP See Multi-link Point to Point Protocol

mount angle An L-shape steel sheet. One side is fixed on the front panel with screws, and the otherside is fixed on the installation hole with screws. On both sides of a rack, there is an L-shaped metal fastener. This ensures that internal components are closely connected withthe rack. Normally, an internal component is installed with two mount angles.

MP See Maintenance Point

MPID Maintenance Point Identification

MPLS See Multi-Protocol Label Switch

MPLS L2VPN The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network.Inthis case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs ofdifferent media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP.

MPLS OAM The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of faultdetection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM andrelevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CR-LSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs.In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum.

MPLS TE Multiprotocol Label Switching Traffic Engineering

MPLS TE tunnel In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported throughmultiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a groupof LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has twoidentifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquelydefine the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE orFILTER_SPEC object.

MS See Multiplex Section

MSP See multiplex section protection



B-19

MSTI See Multiple Spanning Tree Instance

MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

MTBF Mean Time Between Failure

MTTR See Mean Time To Repair

MTU See Maximum Transfer Unit

Multi-link Point toPoint Protocol

A protocol used in ISDN connections. MLPPP lets two B channels act as a single line,doubling connection rates to 128Kbps.

Multi-Protocol LabelSwitch

A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different linklayers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis ofIP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability ofnetworks, and is beneficial to routing.

Multicast A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. Thedestination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP addressranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicastgroup rather than a host.

Multiple SpanningTree Instance

Multiple spanning tree instance. One of a number of Spanning Trees calculated by MSTPwithin an MST Region, to provide a simply and fully connected active topology forframes classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MSTConfiguration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs.

Multiple SpanningTree Protocol

Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using analgorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmedas a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoidedin the loop network.The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs andmultiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwardedin a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.

Multiple SpanningTree Region

The MST region consists of switches that support the MSTP in the LAN and links amongthem. Switches physically and directly connected and configured with the same MSTregion attributes belong to the same MST region. The attributes for the same MST regionare as follows: Same region name Same revision level Same mapping relation betweenthe VLAN ID to MSTI

Multiplex Section The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions.

multiplex sectionprotection

A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between andincluding two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a"protection" channel.

N

N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protectionchannel.

NE See Network Element

NE Explorer The main operation interface, of the U2000, which is used to manage the OptiXequipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can configure, manage and maintain the NE,boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Network Element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. OneNE is at least equipped with one system control board which manages and monitors theentire network element. The NE software runs on the system control board.

network managementsystem

The network management system in charge of the operation, administration, andmaintenance of a network.

Network Service AccessPoint

A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer canaccess OSI network services.

Network to NetworkInterface

This is an internal interface within a network linking two or more elements.

next hop The next router to which a packet is sent from any given router as it traverses a networkon its journey to its final destination.

NLP Normal Link Pulse

NMS See network management system

NNHOP Next-Next-Hop

NNI See Network to Network Interface

Node A node stands for a managed device in the network.For a device with a single frame, onenode stands for one device.For a device with multiple frames, one node stands for oneframe of the device.Therefore, a node does not always mean a device.

Node Protection A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able toprotect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to thePLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able toprotect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to thePLR.

non-gateway networkelement

A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must betransferred by the gateway network element application layer.

non-GNE See non-gateway network element

NSAP See Network Service Access Point

NSF Not Stop Forwarding

NSMI Network Serial Multiplexed Interface

O

OAM See Operation, Administration and Maintenanc

ODF See Optical Distribution Frame

ODU See outdoor unit

One-to-One Backup A local repair method in which a backup tunnel is separately created for each protectedtunnel at a PLR.

Open Shortest PathFirst

A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra'salgorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. Alink state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routersin the area.



B-21

Open SystemsInterconnection

A standard or "reference model" (officially defined by the International Organization ofStandards (ISO)) for how messages should be transmitted between any two points in atelecommunication network. The reference model defines seven layers of functions thattake place at each end of a communication.

Operation,Administration andMaintenanc

Operation, Administration and Maintenance. A group of network support functions thatmonitor and sustain segment operation, activities that are concerned with, but not limitedto, failure detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faultsand keep a segment in an operational state and support activities required to provide theservices of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers.

Optical DistributionFrame

A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.

orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers ormaintenance engineers of different stations.

OSI See Open Systems Interconnection

OSP OptiX Software Platform

OSPF See Open Shortest Path First

outdoor unit The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequencyconversion and amplification for RF signals.

Outloop A method of looping back the input signals received at an port to an output port withoutchanging the structure of the signals.

Output optical power The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.

B.5 P-T

P

Packet over SDH/SONET

A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POSinterface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport ofpacket data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN.

packet switchednetwork

A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode.

Packing case A case which is used for packing the board or subrack.

Path/Channel A logical connection between the point at which a standard frame format for the signalat the given rate is assembled, and the point at which the standard frame format for thesignal is disassembled.

PBS See peak burst size

PCB See Printed Circuit Board

PCI bus PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bitfor interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems.

PDH See Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PDU Protocol Data Unit

PE See Provider Edge




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

peak burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burstIP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. Thisparameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be notless than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

Peak Information Rate Peak Information Rate . A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should benot less than the committed information rate.

Penultimate HopPopping

Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLSenabled network. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS taggedpacket is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to anadjacent Label Edge Router (LER).

Per-Hop-Behavior A forwarding behavior applied at a DS-compliant node. This behavior belongs to thebehavior aggregate defined in the DiffServ domain.

PHB See Per-Hop-Behavior

PHP See Penultimate Hop Popping

PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense Mode

PIM-SM See Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode

PIR See Peak Information Rate

Plesiochronous DigitalHierarchy

A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimumrate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.

Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulatesdata packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.

polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed orrotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave isperpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called verticallypolarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to theplane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if thetip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, thiselectromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.

POS See Packet over SDH/SONET

Power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which suppliespower for the subracks in the cabinet.

PPP See Point-to-Point Protocol

PPVPN Provider Provisioned VPN

PQ See Priority Queuing

PRBS Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence

PRC Primary Reference Clock

Printed Circuit Board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic componentsusing conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated ontoa non-conductive substrate.



B-23

Priority Queuing A priority queue is an abstract data type in computer programming that supports thefollowing three operations: 1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with anassociated priority 2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highestpriority, and return it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") 3)PeekAtNext (optional): look at the element with highest priority without removing it

Processing board area An area for the processing boards on the subrack.

protection groundingcable

A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, onehalf of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.

Protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.

Protocol IndependentMulticast-Sparse Mode

A protocol for efficiently routing to multicast groups that may span wide-area (and inter-domain) internets. This protocol is named protocol independent because it is notdependent on any particular unicast routing protocol for topology discovery, and sparse-mode because it is suitable for groups where a very low percentage of the nodes (andtheir routers) will subscribe to the multicast session. Unlike earlier dense-mode multicastrouting protocols such as DVMRP and PIM-DM which flooded packets everywhere andthen pruned off branches where there were no receivers, PIM-SM explicitly constructsa tree from each sender to the receivers in the multicast group. Multicast packets fromthe sender then follow this tree.

Provider Edge A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE isresponsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, andexchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, aPE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network andthe public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.

Pseudo wire An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is establishedand maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW ismaintained by the two end PEs of a PW.

Pseudo WireEmulation Edge-to-Edge

Pseudo-Wire Emulation Edge to Edge (PWE3) is a type of end-to-end Layer 2transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributes of a telecommunicationservice such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet Switched Network (PSN). PWE3 alsoemulates the essential attributes of low speed Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) circuitand SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real situation.

PSN See packet switched network

PTN Packet Transport Network

PW See Pseudo wire

PWE3 See Pseudo Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge

Q

QoS See Quality of Service

QPSK See Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

Quadrature Phase ShiftKeying

Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) is a modulation method of data transmissionthrough the conversion or modulation and the phase determination of the referencesignals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK usesfour dots in the star diagram. The four dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On thesephases, each QPSK character can perform two-bit coding and display the codes in Graycode on graph with the minimum BER.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Quality of Service Quality of Service, which determines the satisfaction of a subscriber for a service. QoSis influenced by the following factors applicable to all services: service operability,service accessibility, service maintainability, and service integrity.

R

Radio Freqency A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create anelectromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave.The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The ACwith frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classifiedinto such high-frequency current.

Radio NetworkController

A device used in the RNS to control the usage and integrity of radio resources.

Random EarlyDetection

A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet accordingto the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronizationresulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented.

Rapid Spanning TreeProtocol

An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning treeconvergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible withthe STP protocol.

RDI See Remote Defect Indication

Received SignalStrength Indicator

The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in thereceiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDDwithin a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna

Receiver Sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average receivedpower at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-10 BER.

RED See Random Early Detection

REI See Remote Error Indication

Remote DefectIndication

A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminaldetects specific defects in the incoming signal.

Remote ErrorIndication

A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There aretwo types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstreamLTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) issent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte.

remote networkmonitoring

A manage information base (MIB) defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force(IETF). RMON is mainly used to monitor the data flow of one network segment or theentire network.

Resource ReservationProtocol

The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and isused to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transportlayer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network controlprotocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).

Reverse pressure A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit endtransmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit endto slow down the transmission rate.

RF See Radio Freqency

RFC Request For Comment



B-25

RIP See Routing Information Protocol

RMON See remote network monitoring

RNC See Radio Network Controller

Root alarm An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-levelalarms always accompany a root alarm.

route A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.

Routing InformationProtocol

Routing Information Protocol: A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IPprotocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source anddestination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routinginformation to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth.

routing table A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routersregularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on thedestination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--inhops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination.Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available.

RS Reed-Solomon encoding

RSL Received Signal Level

RSSI See Received Signal Strength Indicator

RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol

RTN Radio Transmission Node

S

SD See space diversity

SDH See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SDP Serious Disturbance Period

SEMF Synchronous Equipment Management Function

Service LevelAgreement

A management-documented agreement that defines the relationship between serviceprovider and its customer. It also provides specific, quantifiable information aboutmeasuring and evaluating the delivery of services. The SLA details the specific operatingand support requirements for each service provided. It protects the service provider andcustomer and allows the service provider to provide evidence that it has achieved thedocumented target measure.

SES Severely Errored Second

Setup Priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicatesthe highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt theresources required by other backup tunnels.

SF See Signal Fail

SFP See Small Form-Factor Pluggable




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

side trough The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix thecabinet.

signal cable Common signal cables cover the E1cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signalcable.

Signal Fail SF is a signal indicating the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defectcondition (not being the degraded defect) is active.

Signal Noise Ratio The SNR or S/N (Signal to Noise Ratio) of the amplitude of the desired signal to theamplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times thelogarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).

Simple NetworkManagement Protocol

A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modifythe management information of a network element. This protocol ensures thetransmission of management information between any two points. The pollingmechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, whichcan be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on thenetwork and report these activities to the network console workstation. Controlinformation about each device is maintained by a management information block.

simplex Of or relating to a telecommunications system in which only one message can be sentin either direction at one time.

SLA See Service Level Agreement

Slicing To divide data into the information units proper for transmission.

Small Form-FactorPluggable

A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.

SNC See SubNetwork Connection

SNCP See SubNetwork Connection Protection

SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol

SNR See Signal Noise Ratio

SP Strict Priority

space diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distanceto transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the twosignals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.

Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol. STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop.STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths throughcertain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network.

SSM See Synchronization Status Message

Static Virtual Circuit Static virtual circuit. A static implementation of MPLS L2VPN that transfers L2VPNinformation by manual configuration of VC labels, instead of by a signaling protocol.

Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can betransmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only toactive input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devicesto be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM.

STM See synchronous transport module

STM-1 SDH Transport Module -1



B-27

STM-1e STM-1 Electrical Interface

STM-1o STM-1 Optical Interface

STP See Spanning Tree Protocol

sub-network Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group ofnetwork management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected orcorrelated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clocksubnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, asub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions andclosely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on atopological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-networkplanning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view spacecan be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus onthe equipments under their management.

subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets aredestined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,server or router and is matched with the IP address.

SubNetworkConnection

A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by theassociation of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork.

SubNetworkConnection Protection

A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork connection ifthe working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a requiredlevel.

SVC See Static Virtual Circuit

SVL Shared VLAN Learning

Switch To filter, forward frames based on label or the destination address of each frame. Thisbehavior operates at the data link layer of the OSI model.

Synchronization StatusMessage

A message that is used to transmit the quality levels of timing signals on the synchronoustiming link. Through this message, the node clocks of the SDH network and thesynchronization network can aquire upper stream clock information, and the two performoperations on the corresponding clocks, such as tracing, switchover, or converting hold),and then forward the synchronization information of this node to down stream.

Synchronous DigitalHierarchy

SDH is a transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It definesthe transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speedcounterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH issuitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity sinceit uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.

synchronous transportmodule

An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in theSDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fieldsorganized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 . The information is suitablyconditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronizedto the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Highercapacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacitiesfor N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

T

tail drop A type of QoS. When a queue within a network router reaches its maximum length,packet drops can occur. When a packet drop occurs, connection-based protocols such asTCP slow down their transmission rates in an attempt to let queued packets be serviced,thereby letting the queue empty. This is also known as tail drop because packets aredropped from the input end (tail) of the queue.

Tail drop A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded whenthe queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-widesynchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.

TCI Tag Control Information

TCP See TransmissionControl Protocol

TDM See Time Division Multiplexing

TE See traffic engineering

TEDB See Traffic Engineering DataBase

TelecommunicationManagement Network

The Telecommunications Management Network is a protocol model defined by ITU-Tfor managing open systems in a communications network.An architecture formanagement, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation andadministration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services.

TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch

Time DivisionMultiplexing

It is a multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into timeslots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3......), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engrosstime slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to betransmitted over one channel.

Time To Live A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly.The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in thenetwork. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives,and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.

TMN See Telecommunication Management Network

ToS priority A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header.

TPS See Tributary Protection Switch

traffic engineering A task that effectively maps the service flows to the existing physical topology.

Traffic EngineeringDataBase

TEDB is the abbreviation of the traffic engineering database. MPLS TE needs to knowthe features of the dynamic TE of every links by expanding the current IGP, which usesthe link state algorithm, such as OSPF and IS-IS. The expanded OSPF and IS-IS containsome TE features, such as the link bandwidth and color. The maximum reservedbandwidth of the link and the unreserved bandwidth of every link with priority are ratherimportant. Every router collects the information about TE of every links in its area andgenerates TE DataBase. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLSTE network.

Traffic shaping It is a way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guaranteethe performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of trafficin the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layerdevices, avoiding packet loss and congestion.



B-29

trail A type of transport entity, mainly engaged in transferring signals from the input of thetrail source to the output of the trail sink, and monitoring the integrality of the transferredsignals.

TransmissionControlProtocol

The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets tobe sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the completemessages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliablein the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer inthe ISO/OSI reference model.

Tributary ProtectionSwitch

Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended toprotect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.

trTCM See Two Rate Three Color Marker

TTL See Time To Live

TU Tributary Unit

Tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnelensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnelis an MPLS tunnel.

Two Rate Three ColorMarker

The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, PeakInformation Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associatedburst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds thePIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds ordoesn't exceed the CIR.

B.6 U-Z

U

UAS Unavailable Second

UBR See Unspecified Bit Rate

UDP See User Datagram Protocol

underfloor cabling The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.

UNI See User Network Interface

Unicast The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.

Unspecified Bit Rate No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is idealfor the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded,and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender.

Upper subrack The subrack close to the top of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.

UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply

upward cabling Cables or fibres connect the cabinet with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

User DatagramProtocol

A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send adatagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IPto deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliableconnectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,delayed, or delivered out of order.UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet isreceived.

User Network Interface A type of ATM Forum specification that defines an interoperability standard for theinterface between ATM-based products (a router or an ATM switch) located in a privatenetwork and the ATM switches located within the public carrier networks. Also used todescribe similar connections in Frame Relay networks.

V

V-NNI See virtual network-network interface

V-UNI See Virtual User-Network Interface

Variable Bit Rate One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike apermanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidthand is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.

VBR See Variable Bit Rate

VC See Virtual Channel

VC-12 Virtual Container -12



VCC Virtual Channel Connection

VCC,VPL See Virtual Chanel Connection

VCG See virtual concatenation group

VCI See Virtual Channel Identifier

Virtual ChanelConnection

Virtual Channel Connection. The VC logical trail that carries data between two endpoints in an ATM network. A logical grouping of multiple virtual channel connectionsinto one virtual connection.

Virtual Channel Any logical connection in the ATM network. A VC is the basic unit of switching in theATM network uniquely identified by a virtual path identifier (VPI)/virtual channelidentifier (VCI) value. It is the channel on which ATM cells are transmitted by the sw

Virtual ChannelIdentifier

virtual channel identifier. A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, togetherwith the VPI, is used to identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a seriesof ATM switches on its way to its destination.

virtual concatenationgroup

A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the samevirtual concatenation link

Virtual Leased Line A point-to-point, layer-2 channel that behaves like a leased line by transparentlytransporting different protocols with a guaranteed throughput.



B-31

Virtual Local AreaNetwork

A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physicalnetwork segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associatedwith switched Ethernet.

virtual network-network interface

A virtual network-network interface (V-NNI) is a network-side interface.

Virtual Path Identifier The field in the ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) cell header that identifies to whichVP (Virtual Path) the cell belongs.

Virtual Private LANService

A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLSenables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through theMAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.

Virtual PrivateNetwork

The extension of a private network that encompasses encapsulated, encrypted, andauthenticated links across shared or public networks. VPN connections can provideremote access and routed connections to private networks over the Internet.

Virtual Private WireService

A technology that bears Layer 2 services. VPWS emulates services such as ATM, FR,Ethernet, low-speed TDM circuit, and SONET/SDH in a PSN.

Virtual Routing andForwarding

A technology included in IP (Internet Protocol) network routers that allows multipleinstances of a routing table to exist in a router and work simultaneously.

Virtual Switch Instance An instance through which the physical access links of VPLS can be mapped to thevirtual links. Each VSI provides independent VPLS service. VSI has Ethernet bridgefunction and can terminate PW.

Virtual User-NetworkInterface

virtual user-network interface. A virtual user-network interface, works as an action pointto perform service claissification and traffic control in HQoS.

VLAN See Virtual Local Area Network

VLL See Virtual Leased Line

Voice over IP An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voiceinformation over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital formin discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of thepublic switched telephone network (PSTN).

VoIP See Voice over IP

VPI See Virtual Path Identifier

VPLS See Virtual Private LAN Service

VPN See Virtual Private Network

VPWS See Virtual Private Wire Service

VRF See Virtual Routing and Forwarding

VSI See Virtual Switch Instance

W

Wait to Restore Time A period of time that must elapse before a - from a fault recovered - trail/connection canbe used again to transport the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal trafficsignal from.

WAN See Wide Area Network




Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NEmanagement layer of the transport network

Weighted Fair Queuing Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) is a fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidthallocation weights. This scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of aninterface to queues, according to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. Inthis manner, packets of all priority queues can be scheduled.

Weighted RandomEarly Detection

A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCPsynchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-prioritypacket when calculating the packet loss ratio.

WFQ See Weighted Fair Queuing

Wide Area Network A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which arephysically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as aprovince, a state or even a country.

Winding pipe A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.

wire speed Wire speed refers to the maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value ofwire speed equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.

WMS Wholesale Managed Services

WRED See Weighted Random Early Detection

WRR Weighted Round Robin

WTR See Wait to Restore Time

X

XPD Cross-Polarization Discrimination

XPIC See cross polarization interference cancellation



B-33

rtn 620 idu hardware description v100r005c00 04

Documents

huawei trademarks

document issues

huawei proprietary

huawei industrial basebantian

versionoptix rtn

additional information

product versions

data loss